2008 Saturn Astra Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ii
Preface
This manual describes features that
may or may not be on your
specific vehicle.
Propriétaires Canadiens
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en français auprès de
concessionnaire ou à l’adresse
suivante:
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
Helm Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer or from:
SATURN and the SATURN Emblem
are registered trademarks, and
the name ASTRA is a trademark of
Saturn Corporation. GENERAL
MOTORS and GM are registered
trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Using this Manual
Read this owner manual from
beginning to end to learn about the
vehicle’s features and controls.
Pictures and words work together to
explain things.
This manual includes the latest
information at the time it was
printed. Saturn reserves the right to
make changes after that time
without further notice.
1-800-551-4123
helminc.com
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 94701908 B Second Printing
©2007 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iv
Preface
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-2
Seats and Restraints
To move a manual seat forward or
rearward:
Seat Height Adjuster
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{ CAUTION
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver’s seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push
a pedal when you do not want
to. Adjust the driver’s seat only
when the vehicle is not moving.
To raise and lower the manual
seat, move the lever up or down
repeatedly until the seat is at
the desired height.
1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the bar.
Try to move the seat with your body
to be sure the seat is locked in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-3
Lumbar Seat Adjustment
Reclining Seatbacks
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Sitting in a reclined position
when your vehicle is in motion
can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts
cannot do their job when you
are reclined like this.
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust
the seat while the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement
could startle and confuse you,
or make you push a pedal when
you do not want to. Adjust the
driver’s seat only when the
vehicle is not moving.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck
or other injuries.
On seats with this feature, turn the
knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to increase or decrease the
lumbar support.
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not
at your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your
safety belt properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-4
Seats and Restraints
Seatback Latches
(Three Door Model)
{ CAUTION
For easy entry/exit to the rear seats
on three door models:
If the seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting
there. Always push and pull
on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
To return the seat to the upright
position:
To adjust a manual reclining
seatback, turn the knob. Do not lean
on the seatback while adjusting it.
1. Remove any objects in front of or
behind the seat.
2. Move the entire seat rearward.
1. Lift the lever, and tilt the seatback
forward.
3. Lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat
and return the seatback to
the upright position.
2. Lower the lever and move the
entire seat completely forward.
4. Lower the lever then push and
pull on the seatback to be sure
it is locked in place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-5
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front seats have
adjustable head restraints.
{ CAUTION
With head restraints that are
not installed and adjusted
properly, there is a greater
chance that occupants will
suffer a neck/spinal injury
in a crash. Do not drive until
the head restraints for all
occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of the restraint is at the
same height as the top of the
occupant’s head.
To adjust the head restraint, press
the button located on the side of the
head restraint. Pull up or push down
on the restraint to adjust it.
This position reduces the chance of
a neck injury in a crash.
Try to move the head restraint after
the button is released to make
sure that it is locked in place.
The vehicle’s front seat head
restraints are not designed to
be removed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-6
Seats and Restraints
Active Head Restraint System
Heated Seats
On vehicles with heated front seats,
the controls for each seat are located
on the center of the instrument panel.
To operate the heated seats the
ignition must be on.
M (Heated Seat): Press this
button to turn on the heated seat.
The light on the button will come on
to indicate that the feature is working.
Press the button to cycle through
the temperature settings of high,
medium, and low and to turn the
heat to the seat off. The number of
indicator lights above the button will
show the level of heat selected: three
for high, two for medium, and one
for low.
To adjust the headrest in the rear
seat center position, pull up to
raise it.
The vehicle has an active head
restraint system in the front seating
positions.
To lower the headrest, press the
buttons located on the top of
the seatback and push the head
rest down.
These automatically tilt forward to
reduce the risk of neck injury if
the vehicle is hit from behind.
The vehicle’s rear seat headrests
are not designed to be removed.
Rear Seat Headrests
The vehicle has headrests in all
seating positions of the rear seats.
The headrests in the rear outboard
positions adjust like the front
seat head restraints.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-7
To lower the seatback:
Rear Seats
CAUTION (Continued)
Rear Seat Operation
After raising the rear seatback,
always check to be sure that
the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are
not twisted.
{ CAUTION
If the seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting
there. Always push and pull
on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
Folding the Seatback
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1. Press the button located on the
top of the seatback to release it.
{ CAUTION
2. Fold the seatback forward.
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured.
Before folding the seatback down,
the safety belt must be unbuckled
and not in the storage clip. The
front seat must be moved all
the way forward, and not reclined.
The headrest must be completely
lowered.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-8
Seats and Restraints
To return the seat to the sitting
position:
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
Safety Belts
This section of the manual describes
how to use safety belts properly.
It also describes some things not
to do with safety belts.
4. Remove the safety belt from the
storage clip.
The seatback must be locked or
you will not be able to pull out
and use the rear center safety
belt. Always push and pull on the
seatback to be sure it is locked.
{ CAUTION
Do not let anyone ride where he
or she cannot wear a safety belt
properly. If you are in a crash
and you are not wearing a safety
belt, your injuries can be much
worse. You can hit things inside
the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured
or killed. In the same crash, you
might not be, if you are buckled
up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your
1. Make sure the safety belt is
through the storage clip.
2. Lift the seatback and push it
rearward until it is locked in
the sitting position.
passenger(s) are restrained
properly too.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Why Safety Belts Work
1-9
In most states and in all Canadian
provinces, the law requires
wearing safety belts. Here is why:
{ CAUTION
When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
It is extremely dangerous to
ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a
You never know if you will be
in a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in
any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone
in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
page 4-14.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
it is just a seat on wheels.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-10
Seats and Restraints
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the
vehicle. The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until
stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-11
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are upside down.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as
the vehicle does. You get more time
to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the
forces. That is why safety belts make
such good sense.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in
frontal collisions, but especially in
side and other collisions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-12
Seats and Restraints
First, before you or your
passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information
you should know.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
How to Wear Safety Belts
Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash — even
one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does not
protect you from things beyond
your control, such as bad drivers.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and infants.
If a child will be riding in the vehicle,
page 1-38. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
Most accidents occur within
25 miles (40 km) of home.
And the greatest number of
serious injuries and deaths
occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Sit up straight and always keep
your feet on the floor in front of you.
The lap part of the belt should be
worn low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less
Safety belts are for everyone.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are
wearing safety belts.
likely to slide under the lap belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-13
If you slid under it, the belt would
apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even
fatal injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder and
across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously hurt if
your shoulder belt is too loose.
In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could
increase injury. The shoulder
belt should fit snugly against
your body.
You can be seriously hurt if your
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn
low and snug on the hips, just
touching the thighs.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a
sudden stop or crash.
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
A: The lap belt is too loose.
It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
protection this way.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-14
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured if
your belt is buckled in the
wrong place like this. In a
crash, the belt would go up
over your abdomen. The belt
forces would be there, not on
the pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into
the buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong
A: The belt is over an armrest.
buckle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-15
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured if
your belt goes over an armrest
like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash,
you can slide under the belt.
The belt force would then be
applied on the abdomen, not on
the pelvic bones, and that could
cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the
armrests.
You can be seriously injured
if you wear the shoulder belt
under your arm. In a crash,
your body would move too far
forward, which would increase
the chance of head and neck
injury. Also, the belt would
apply too much force to the
ribs, which are not as strong as
shoulder bones. You could also
severely injure internal organs
like your liver or spleen. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-16
Seats and Restraints
Q: What is wrong with this?
Q: What is wrong with this?
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder
belt properly. In a crash, you
would not be restrained by the
shoulder belt. Your body could
move too far forward increasing
the chance of head and neck
injury. You might also slide
under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied
right on the abdomen. That
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt
should go over the shoulder
and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-17
{ CAUTION
You can be seriously injured by
a twisted belt. In a crash, you
would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact
forces. If a belt is twisted,
make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/
retailer to fix it.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let
it get twisted.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to
make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder
belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
Make sure the release button on
the buckle is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
If you ever pull the shoulder
portion of a passenger belt out
all the way, you may engage the
child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-18
Seats and Restraints
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you.
Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash. See “Shoulder Belt
Height Adjustment” later in this
section.
Before you close a door, be sure
the belt is out of the way. If you slam
the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver
and right front passenger position.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull
up on the shoulder belt.
Adjust the height so that the
shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt
should be away from the face and
neck, but not falling off the shoulder.
Incorrect positioning of the shoulder
belt can reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt.
It may be necessary to pull
stitching on the safety belt
through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller
occupants.
To unlatch the belt, push the button
on the buckle. The belt should go
back out of the way. When the safety
belt is not in use, slide the latch plate
up the safety belt webbing. The latch
plate should rest on the stitching on
the safety belt, near the guide loop
on the side wall.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-19
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
The vehicle has safety belt
pretensioners for the front outboard
occupants. Although you cannot see
them, they are part of the safety belt
assembly. They can help tighten the
safety belts during the early stages
of a moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner activation
are met. And, if the vehicle has
side impact airbags, safety belt
pretensioners can help tighten
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides
may provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have
outgrown booster seats and for some
adults. When installed on a shoulder
belt, the comfort guide positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each
outboard passenger position in the
rear seat. Here is how to install
a comfort guide to the safety belt:
To move it, push the button on the
front of the height adjuster and
move the height adjuster to
the desired position.
the safety belts in a side crash.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from the
side of the seatback to remove
the guide from its storage pocket.
Pretensioners work only once. If
they activate in a crash, you will need
to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for the safety belt system.
After you move the adjuster to
where you want it, try to move it
down without pushing the button
to make sure it has locked into
position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-20
Seats and Restraints
{ CAUTION
A safety belt that is not
properly worn may not provide
the protection needed in a
crash. The person wearing the
belt could be seriously injured.
The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the
body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt and
insert the two edges of the belt
into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not
twisted and it lies flat. The elastic
cord must be under the belt
and the guide on top.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-21
To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that you can take them
out of the guide. Push the guide into
the pocket on the side of seatback.
Properly secure the guide loop
before folding the seatback. The
comfort guide and vehicle can be
damaged while closing a door if it is
not properly secured in its storage
location.
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like
all occupants, they are more likely
to be seriously injured if they do
not wear safety belts.
4. Buckle, position, and release
the safety belt as described
previously in this section.
A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion
should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout
the pregnancy.
Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-22
Seats and Restraints
Safety Belt Extender
Safety Belt Check
Care of Safety Belts
If the safety belt will fasten around
you, you should use it.
Now and then, make sure the safety
belt reminder light and all your belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt
system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts
may not protect you in a crash. They
can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new
one right away.
Keep belts clean and dry.
But if a safety belt is not long
enough, your dealer/retailer will order
you an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults.
Never use it for securing child seats.
To wear it, attach it to the regular
safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes
with the extender.
{ CAUTION
Do not bleach or dye safety
belts. If you do, it may severely
weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide
adequate protection. Clean
safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
page 1-22.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-23
After a minor crash, replacement of
safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer/retailer to have the
safety belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts After
a Crash
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following
airbags:
•
•
A frontal airbag for the driver.
{ CAUTION
A frontal airbag for the right front
passenger.
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death
in a crash. To help make sure
the safety belt systems are
working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any
necessary replacements made
as soon as possible.
•
•
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the driver.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at
the time of the crash.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag for the right front
passenger.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle or
while you are driving. See Airbag
•
•
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
A roof-rail airbag for the
right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly behind
the right front passenger.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will
have the word AIRBAG embossed in
the trim or on an attached label near
the deployment opening.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-24
Seats and Restraints
For frontal airbags, the word
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
{ CAUTION
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for
the driver and on the instrument
panel for the right front passenger.
Frontal airbags are designed to
deploy in moderate to severe
frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate
in rollover, rear crashes, or in
many side crashes.
{ CAUTION
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing
your safety belt during a crash
helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, but do not replace them.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG
will appear on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
Seat-mounted side impact
airbags and roof-rail airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate
to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your
vehicle. They are not designed
to inflate in frontal, in rollover,
or in rear crashes.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce
the risk of injury from the force of
an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
Everyone in your vehicle
should wear a safety belt
properly — whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-25
Where Are the Airbags?
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Airbags inflate with great force,
faster than the blink of an eye.
Anyone who is up against, or
very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the
airbag, as you would be if you
were sitting on the edge of your
seat or leaning forward. Safety
belts help keep you in position
before and during a crash.
Always wear your safety belt,
even with airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as
Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection
for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see
page 1-38.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the
middle of the steering wheel.
The right front passenger’s frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel on
the passenger’s side.
possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle.
There is an airbag readiness light
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag
electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 4-14
for more information.
Occupants should not lean on
or sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted side impact
airbags and/or roof-rail airbags.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-26
Seats and Restraints
{ CAUTION
CAUTION (Continued)
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate
properly or it might force the
object into that person causing
severe injury or even death.
The path of an inflating airbag
must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant
and an airbag, and do not
Do not use seat accessories
that block the inflation path of
a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Never secure anything to the
roof of a vehicle with roof-rail
airbags by routing a rope or
tie down through any door or
window opening. If you do, the
path of an inflating roof-rail
airbag will be blocked.
Driver Side shown,
Passenger Side similar
attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or
near any other airbag covering.
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
(Continued)
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-27
Frontal airbags may inflate at
different crash speeds. For example:
In addition, the vehicle has
dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
The vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
•
If the vehicle hits a stationary
object, the airbags could inflate at
a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver’s or right
front passenger’s head and chest.
However, they are only designed
to inflate if the impact exceeds
a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
•
If the vehicle hits an object that
deforms, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits an object that
does not deform.
moderate frontal impact and a
more severe frontal impact. For
moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
•
•
If the vehicle hits a narrow object
(like a pole), the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
The vehicle has seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. Seat-mounted side impact
and roof-rail airbags will inflate if
the crash severity is above the
system’s designed threshold level.
The threshold level can vary with
specific vehicle design.
Whether the frontal airbags will
or should deploy is not based on
how fast your vehicle is traveling.
It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact, and how
quickly your vehicle slows down.
If the vehicle goes into an object
at an angle, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with
specific vehicle design.
Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-28
Seats and Restraints
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal
impacts, rollovers, or rear impacts.
A seat-mounted side impact
airbag is intended to deploy on
the side of the vehicle that is struck.
A roof-rail airbag is intended to
deploy on the side of the vehicle
that is struck.
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate?
How Does an Airbag
Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Airbags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags distribute the force of the
impact more evenly over the
occupant’s upper body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant’s upper body.
In any particular crash, no one
can say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags,
there are airbag modules in the side
of the front seatbacks closest to the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail
airbags, there are airbag modules in
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the
side windows that have occupant
seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many
types of collisions, primarily because
the occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. See When Should
an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-27
for more information.
Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-29
Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right
front passenger airbag.
What Will You See After
an Airbag Inflates?
{ CAUTION
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
After the frontal airbags and
•
Airbags are designed to inflate
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
only once. After an airbag inflates,
you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not
get them, the airbag system will
not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system
will include airbag modules and
possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers
the need to replace other parts.
asthma or other breathing
trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you
have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle
after an airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience
breathing problems following an
airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
•
•
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a crash.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out
of the windshield or being able to
steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
In many crashes severe enough
to inflate the airbag, windshields
are broken by vehicle deformation.
Let only qualified technicians work
on the airbag systems. Improper
service can mean that an airbag
system will not work properly.
See your dealer/retailer for
service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-30
Seats and Restraints
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part
of the right front passenger’s seat.
The sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
should be enabled (may inflate)
or not.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
in the rearview mirror when you start
the vehicle.
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the
word ON or the word OFF, or the
symbol for on or the symbol for off,
will be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including: an
infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a
forward-facing child seat; an older
child riding in a booster seat; and
children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
United States
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag under certain
conditions. The driver’s airbags
are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-31
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag if:
CAUTION (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped), no system
is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag(s) are off.
•
The right front passenger seat is
unoccupied.
{ CAUTION
•
The system determines that an
infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat.
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of
the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint
can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates and the
•
•
•
•
The system determines that a
small child is present in a child
restraint.
The system determines that
a small child is present in a
booster seat.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even
if the airbag(s) are off. If you
secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as
it will go. It is better to secure
the child restraint in a rear seat.
A right front passenger takes
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
The right front passenger seat is
occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
(Continued)
•
Or, if there is a critical problem
with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-32
Seats and Restraints
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag,
the off indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbags are
off. See Passenger Airbag Status
If, after reinstalling the child restraint
and restarting the vehicle, the on
indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is
not pressing the child restraint into
the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback
and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under
the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate)
the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag anytime the system senses
that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the right front passenger’s
seat. When the passenger sensing
system has allowed the airbags to
be enabled, the on indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the
airbags are active.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, turn
the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and
reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions and refer to Securing
on page 1-53.
For some children who have
Remove any additional material from
the seat such as blankets, cushions,
seat covers, seat heaters, or seat
massagers before reinstalling or
securing the child restraint.
outgrown child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side impact
airbag, depending upon the person’s
seating posture and body build.
Everyone in the vehicle who has
outgrown child restraints should wear
a safety belt properly —whether or
not there is an airbag for that person.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure
the child in the child restraint in
a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-33
If a person of adult-size is sitting
in the right front passenger’s seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting
properly in the seat. If this happens,
turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat,
such as blankets, cushions, seat
covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers and ask the person
to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright
in the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with the person’s legs
comfortably extended. Restart the
vehicle and have the person remain
in this position for two to three
minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and then enable
the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag.
{ CAUTION
If the airbag readiness light in
the instrument panel cluster
ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be
wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have
the protection of the airbag(s).
on page 4-14 for more on this,
including important safety
information.
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the
seat during vehicle maneuvers
and braking, which helps the
passenger sensing system maintain
the passenger airbag status.
See “Safety Belts” and “Child
Restraints” in the Index for
additional information about
the importance of proper
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion, or
aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system operates.
restraint use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-34
Seats and Restraints
We recommend that you not use
seat covers or other aftermarket
equipment other than any that GM
has approved for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
page 1-35 for more information about
modifications that can affect how the
system operates.
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Stowing of articles under the
passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with
the proper operation of the
passenger sensing system.
For up to 10 seconds after the
ignition is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during
improper service. You can be
injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid
yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the airbag
system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures,
and make sure the person
performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The passenger sensing system may
suppress the airbag deployment
when liquid soaks into the seat.
If this happens, the off indicator
in the passenger airbag status
indicator and the airbag readiness
light on the instrument panel will
be lit. The system should resume
normal operation after the seat is
allowed to dry. If the system operates
incorrectly after the seat has dried,
have your dealer/retailer check the
system.
Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle
should be serviced. There are
parts of the airbag system in
several places around your vehicle.
Your dealer/retailer and the service
manual have information about
servicing your vehicle and the airbag
system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-35
which includes sensors that are
part of the passenger’s seat.
The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the
original seat trim is replaced
with non-GM covers, upholstery
or trim, or with GM covers,
upholstery or trim designed for a
different vehicle. Any object, such
as an aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or device,
installed under or on top of the
seat fabric, could also interfere
with the operation of the
passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper
deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
passenger sensing system
from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
and addresses for Customer
Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Assistance are in Step Two of the
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
in this manual. See Customer
page 11-1.
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle’s frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
A: If you have questions,
call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual.
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar
garnish trim, front sensors,
or airbag wiring can affect the
operation of the airbag system.
on page 1-30.
In addition, your dealer/retailer and
the service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
If you have any questions about
this, you should contact Customer
Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system for the
right front passenger position,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-36
Seats and Restraints
If an airbag inflates, you will need
to replace airbag system parts.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Airbag System Check
Replacing Airbag System
Parts After a Crash
The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance
or replacement. Make sure the
airbag readiness light is working.
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started
or comes on when you are driving,
the airbag system may not work
properly. Have the vehicle serviced
right away. See Airbag Readiness
information.
{ CAUTION
A crash can damage the
on page 4-14 for more information.
airbag systems in your vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash,
resulting in serious injury or
even death. To help make
sure your airbag systems are
working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any
necessary replacements made
as soon as possible.
Notice: If an airbag covering is
damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any opened
or broken airbag covers, have
the airbag covering and/or airbag
module replaced. For the location
of the airbag modules, see What
page 1-28. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-37
The manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the booster seat, state the
weight and height limitations for that
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the below fit test:
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder belt
can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck.
The lap belt should fit snugly
below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. This applies belt
force to the child’s pelvic bones in
a crash. It should never be worn
over the abdomen, which could
cause severe or even fatal
Older Children
•
•
•
•
Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on the
shoulder? If yes, continue. If no,
then return to the booster seat.
internal injuries in a crash.
Does the lap belt fit low and snug
on the hips, touching the thighs?
If yes, continue. If no, return to the
booster seat.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system
secured in a rear seating position.
Older children who have outgrown
booster seats should wear the
vehicle’s safety belts.
Can proper safety belt fit be
maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no, return
to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not
buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-38
Seats and Restraints
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Never do this.
Never do this.
Never allow two children to
wear the same safety belt.
The safety belt can not properly
spread the impact forces. In a
crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously
injured. A safety belt must be
used by only one person at
a time.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly.
In a crash, the child would not
be restrained by the shoulder
belt. The child could move too
far forward increasing the
chance of head and neck injury.
The child might also slide under
the lap belt. The belt force would
then be applied right on the
Infants and Young
Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-39
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Children can be seriously
injured or strangled if a
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a
crash. For example, in a crash at
only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb
(5.5 kg) infant will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force
on a person’s arms. An infant
should be secured in an
shoulder belt is wrapped around
their neck and the safety belt
continues to tighten. Never
leave children unattended in a
vehicle and never allow children
to play with the safety belts.
Every time infants and young
children ride in vehicles, they should
have the protection provided by
appropriate restraints. Children who
are not restrained properly can strike
other people, or can be thrown out
of the vehicle. In addition, young
children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone; they need
to use a child restraint.
appropriate restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-40
Seats and Restraints
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available.
When purchasing a child
{ CAUTION
Never do this.
restraint, be sure it is designed
to be used in a motor vehicle.
If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal
motor vehicle safety standards.
Children who are up against, or
very close to, any airbag when it
inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat.
If you must secure a
The restraint manufacturer’s
instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
Q: What are the different types of
add-on child restraints?
forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle’s
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
seat as far back as it will go.
consideration not only the child’s
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle
in which it will be used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-41
Child Restraint Systems
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash,
infants need complete support.
This is because an infant’s neck
is not fully developed and its
head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a
crash, an infant in a rear-facing
child restraint settles into the
restraint, so the crash forces
can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s
body, the back and shoulders.
Infants should always be
A young child’s hip bones are
still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not
remain low on the hip bones,
as it should. Instead, it may
settle up around the child’s
abdomen. In a crash, the belt
would apply force on a body
area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk
of serious or fatal injuries
(A) Rear-Facing Infant Seat
A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the infant.
during a crash, young children
should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
secured in rear-facing child
restraints.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to keep
the infant positioned in the restraint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-42
Seats and Restraints
Securing an Add-On Child
Restraint in the Vehicle
{ CAUTION
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with
that child restraint and the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat
(C) Booster Seats
A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child’s body
with the harness.
A booster seat (C) is a child
instructions in this manual.
restraint designed to improve the fit
of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-43
To help reduce the chance of injury,
the child restraint must be secured in
the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by
lap belts or the lap belt portion of a
lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and
page 1-45 for more information.
A child can be endangered in a
crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Where to Put the
Restraint
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child restraint
system or infant restraint system
secured in a rear seating position.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
We recommend that children and
child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
{ CAUTION
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions that
come with the restraint which may be
on the restraint itself or in a booklet,
or both, and to this manual. The child
restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain
a replacement copy from the
A child can be seriously injured
or killed in a crash if the child
is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Secure the
child properly following the
instructions that came with
that child restraint.
manufacturer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-44
Seats and Restraints
A label on the sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with the child
restraint to make sure it is compatible
with this vehicle.
CAUTION (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
no system is fail-safe. No one
can guarantee that an airbag
will not deploy under some
unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the
child restraint properly.
{ CAUTION
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of
the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint
can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates and the
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint
in the vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even
if the airbag is off. If you secure
a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat
as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child
restraint in a rear seat.
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
on page 1-30 for additional
information.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
Lower Anchors
1-45
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use either
the lower anchors or the safety belts
to properly secure the child restraint.
A child restraint must never be
installed using only the top tether
and anchor.
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children
(LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors
in the vehicle and attachments
In order to use the LATCH system
in your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments
in your vehicle.
Lower anchors (A) are metal
bars built into the vehicle. There
are two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
on the child restraint that are made
for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
Not all vehicle seating positions
or child restraints have lower
anchors and attachments or top
tether anchors and attachments.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-46
Seats and Restraints
Your child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Top Tether Anchor
Lower Anchor and Top Tether
Anchor Locations
Some child restraints with top
tethers are designed for use with or
without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always
to be attached. In Canada, the law
requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that
the tether be attached. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top
of the child restraint to the vehicle.
A top tether anchor is built into
the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor
in the vehicle in order to reduce
the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving
or in a crash.
Rear Seat
If the child restraint does not have
a top tether, one can be obtained, in
kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer
whether or not a kit is available.
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions
with two lower anchors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-47
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor if
a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top tether must
be attached. There is no place to
attach the top tether in this position.
To assist you in locating the lower
anchors, each seating position
with lower anchors has two labels,
near the crease between the
Accident statistics show that
children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than
the front seat. See Where to Put
additional information.
seatback and the seat cushion.
The top tether anchors are located
on the seatback for each rear seating
position. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position where
the child restraint will be placed.
If the top tether anchors are
covered, the top tether anchor
symbol will be located on the cover
to assist you in locating them.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-48
Seats and Restraints
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH
System
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Do not attach more than
Children can be seriously
injured or strangled if a
one child restraint to a single
anchor. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single
anchor could cause the anchor
or attachment to come loose
or even break during a crash.
A child or others could be
injured. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during
a crash, attach only one child
restraint per anchor.
{ CAUTION
shoulder belt is wrapped
around their neck and the
safety belt continues to tighten.
Buckle any unused safety belts
behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the
way out of the retractor to set
the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint
has been installed.
If a LATCH-type child restraint
is not attached to anchors, the
child restraint will not be able
to protect the child correctly.
In a crash, the child could be
seriously injured or killed. Install
a LATCH-type child restraint
properly using the anchors, or
use the vehicle’s safety belts to
secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with
the child restraint and the
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicle’s safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to avoid
rubbing the LATCH attachments.
instructions in this manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-49
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to your
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. If the anchor is covered,
open the cover to expose
the anchor.
2.3. Route, attach, and tighten
the top tether according
to your child restraint
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you are
using a dual tether, route the
tether around the headrest or
head restraint.
instructions and the
following instructions:
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the
lower attachments on the
child restraint to the lower
anchors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-50
Seats and Restraints
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at
the time of the crash.
Replacing LATCH
System Parts After
a Crash
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat)
{ CAUTION
A crash can damage the
When securing a child restraint in
a rear seating position, study the
instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible
with this vehicle.
LATCH system in the vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
not properly secure the child
restraint, resulting in serious
injury or even death in a crash.
To help make sure the LATCH
system is working properly
after a crash, see your dealer/
retailer to have the system
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon
as possible.
If the position you are using
has an adjustable headrest
or head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
raise the headrest or head
restraint and route the tether
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between the
headrest or head restraint
posts.
If your child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
page 1-45 for how to install your child
restraint using LATCH. If you secure
a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower
anchor locations.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system
and it was being used during a crash,
new LATCH system parts may be
needed.
3. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-51
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor if
a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the
instructions that come with the child
restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
If you need to install more than
one child restraint in the rear seat,
be sure to read Where to Put
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle’s safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached.
If your child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be using
the safety belt to secure the child
restraint in this position. Be sure to
follow the instructions that came with
the child restraint. Secure the child in
the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
3. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button
is positioned so you would
be able to unbuckle the safety
belt quickly if necessary.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-52
Seats and Restraints
6. If your child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
page 1-45 for more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt
and let it go back all the way.
If the top tether is attached to
a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using
a forward-facing child restraint,
you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-53
Securing Child Restraints
(Right Front Seat)
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint.
on page 1-43.
{ CAUTION
CAUTION (Continued)
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right
front passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of
the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the
inflating airbag. A child in a
forward-facing child restraint
can be seriously injured or
killed if the right front passenger
airbag inflates and the
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off. If you secure
a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always
move the front passenger seat
as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child
In addition, your vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which
is designed to turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
under certain conditions. See
more information on this, including
important safety information.
restraint in a rear seat.
on page 1-30 for additional
information.
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
If your child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
page 1-45 for how to install your child
restraint using LATCH. If you secure
a child restraint using a safety belt
and it uses a top tether, see Lower
anchor locations.
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag,
no system is fail-safe. No one
can guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front.” This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-54
Seats and Restraints
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored,
or if the instructions that come with
the child restraint say that the
top strap must be anchored.
the vehicle. See Passenger
page 4-15.
Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able
to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions
of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint.
The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
In Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether
be attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt
all the way out of the retractor to
set the lock.
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger’s frontal and
seat-mounted side impact airbag,
the off indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start
4. Push the latch plate into the
buckle until it clicks.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seats and Restraints
1-55
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on
and stay on when the vehicle
is started.
Remove any additional material from
the seat such as blankets, cushions,
seat covers, seat heaters or seat
massagers before reinstalling or
securing the child restraint.
If a child restraint has been
If the on indicator is still lit, secure
the child in the child restraint in
a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
installed and the on indicator is lit,
turn the vehicle off. Remove the
child restraint from the vehicle and
reinstall the child restraint.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt
and let it go back all the way.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint
and restarting the vehicle, the on
indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is
not pressing the child restraint into
the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback
and adjust the seat cushion if
6. To tighten the belt, push down
on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. If you are using
a forward-facing child restraint,
you may find it helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the
vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
7. Push and pull the child restraint
in different directions to be sure
it is secure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-56
Seats and Restraints
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-2
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys
{ CAUTION
Leaving children in a vehicle
with the ignition key is
dangerous for many reasons,
children or others could be
badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with
the keys in the ignition and
children could be seriously
injured or killed if caught in
the path of a closing window.
Do not leave the keys in a
vehicle with children.
Press the button on the RKE
transmitter to extend the key.
Press the button and the key
blade to retract the key.
The key, located in the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, is
used for the ignition and all locks.
When a new vehicle is delivered,
a key number is included in
the vehicle documents.
Each key number tells your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-3
Keep this number in a safe place.
If you lose your keys, you will
be able to have one made easily
using this number. If you need
a new key, go to your dealer/retailer
for the correct key code.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range, try this:
•
Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle. Stand closer
1. This device may not cause
interference.
during rainy or snowy weather.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
Notice: If you ever lock your
keys in the vehicle, you may have
to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
•
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few
steps to the left or right, hold
the transmitter higher, and
try again.
undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210
of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two
conditions:
If you are locked out of your vehicle,
contact Roadside Assistance or
OnStar. See Roadside Assistance
•
•
Check the transmitter’s battery.
See “Battery Replacement”
later in this section.
1. This device may not cause
interference.
If the transmitter is still not
working correctly, see your
dealer/retailer or a qualified
technician for service.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-4
Keys, Doors and Windows
To replace the battery:
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) System Operation
on page 2-2 for additional
information.
Each RKE transmitter is uniquely
coded to prevent another transmitter
from unlocking the vehicle. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased
through your dealer/retailer. All
transmitters need to be re-coded to
match the new transmitter. The lost
transmitter will no longer work after
the new transmitters are re-coded.
The vehicle can have a maximum of
five transmitters coded to it.
c
(Lock): Press to lock the doors,
liftgate and fuel tank door.
Battery Replacement
2. Open the RKE transmitter.
3. Remove the old battery. Do not
use a metal object.
4. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing up. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
Replace the battery if the Remote
Control Battery check message
appears in the DIC. See “Remote
Control Battery Check” under DIC
If the driver door is open, the doors
will not lock.
d (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors, liftgate and fuel tank door.
Press and hold d to lower all
the windows.
5. Close the RKE transmitter.
Notice: When replacing the
battery, do not touch any of
the circuitry on the transmitter.
Static from your body could
damage the transmitter.
Synchronization
After changing the battery, turn the
ignition to ON/RUN. This will
synchronize the key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Door Locks
2-5
Doors and Locks
CAUTION (Continued)
The power door lock switch is
located on the instrument panel.
Door Locks
• Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock your
vehicle whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your
doors can help prevent this
from happening.
T (Door Lock): Press to lock
or unlock the doors, liftgate, and the
fuel tank door.
{ CAUTION
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
• Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door
is locked, the handle will not
open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out
of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly
and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
If the driver’s door is not closed
properly, the power door lock switch
will not lock the doors.
When the vehicle has been
unlocked, the key is not in the
ignition, and no door is opened the
vehicle will automatically lock
itself again after one minute.
To manually lock or unlock your
vehicle, use the key in the driver’s
door from the outside to unlock
it. When the driver door is opened
the entire vehicle is unlocked. There
are also window sill knobs that
unlock each door from the inside.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-6
Keys, Doors and Windows
To set the locks, insert a key into
the slot and turn it to the horizontal
position. The door can only be
opened from the outside with the
door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to
the vertical position.
Rear Door Security
Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security
locks to prevent passengers from
opening the rear doors from the
inside.
CAUTION (Continued)
If you must drive with the liftgate
open, or if electrical wiring or
other cable connections must
pass through the seal between
the body and the liftgate:
• Make sure all other windows
are shut.
Liftgate
• Turn the fan on your heating
or cooling system to its
highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That
will force outside air into your
vehicle. See Climate Control
System in the index.
• If you have air outlets on or
under the instrument panel,
open them all the way.
{ CAUTION
It can be dangerous to drive
with the liftgate open because
carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You
cannot see or smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousness and
even death.
Open the rear doors to access the
security locks on the inside edge
of each door.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-7
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
obstructions such as a garage
door, you could damage the
liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
area above and behind the liftgate
is clear before opening it.
Theft-Deterrent
Systems
Vehicle theft is big business,
especially in some cities. This
vehicle has theft-deterrent features,
however, they do not make it
impossible to steal.
Immobilizer
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
Use the inside pull handle to lower
and close the liftgate.
1. This device may not cause
interference.
Do not press the touchpad while
closing the liftgate. This will
cause the liftgate to be unlatched.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Always close the liftgate before
driving.
Press the touchpad located in the
handle of the liftgate and lift up
to open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-8
Keys, Doors and Windows
This device complies with RSS-210
of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two
conditions:
The system is automatically
disarmed when the key is turned to
ON/RUN.
If the engine does not start and the
service vehicle soon light flashes
there is a problem with the system.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
You do not have to manually arm or
disarm the system.
1. This device may not cause
interference.
If the engine still does not start and
the service vehicle soon light
continues to flash, try another key.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
If the engine still does not start
with the other key, the vehicle needs
service. If the vehicle does start,
the first key may be damaged.
See your dealer/retailer who can
service the theft-deterrent system
and have a new key made.
The service vehicle soon light,
located in the instrument panel
cluster, comes on if there is
a problem with arming or disarming
the theft-deterrent system.
Changes or modifications to this
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
In an emergency, contact Roadside
Service. See Roadside Assistance
The key uses a transponder that
matches an immobilizer control unit
in the vehicle. Only the correct
key starts the vehicle.
Immobilizer Operation
This vehicle has a passive
theft-deterrent system.
Do not leave the key or device that
disarms or deactivates the theft
deterrent system in the vehicle.
When starting the vehicle, the
service vehicle soon light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned on.
The system is automatically armed
when the key is removed from
the ignition.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-9
Arming the System
How the System Alarm is
Activated
Content Theft-Deterrent
This vehicle has a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
To arm the system:
To activate the system if it is armed,
open any door, the liftgate or
hood. The horn will sound and the
hazard warning flashers will flash.
1. Close all doors, windows, hood
and sunroof.
2. Press
c
on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
How to Turn Off the System
Alarm
The security light flashes when the
vehicle is armed.
To turn off the system alarm, do
one of the following:
Disarming the System
The security light is located on the
instrument panel.
To disarm the system, do one of the
following:
•
Press the unlock button on the
RKE transmitter.
Do not use this system if there are
people in the vehicle. The doors
can not be unlocked from inside the
vehicle.
•
•
Press d on the RKE transmitter.
•
Insert the key in the ignition and
turn it on.
Turn the ignition on.
The theft-deterrent system is
disarmed when the alarm is
turned off.
The security light stays on for
approximately one second when the
vehicle is disarming.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-10
Keys, Doors and Windows
Power Windows
Windows
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Leaving children in a vehicle
with the keys is dangerous for
many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured
or even killed. They could
operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the
vehicle move. The windows will
function and they could be
seriously injured or killed if
caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a
vehicle with children.
Leaving children, helpless
adults, or pets in a vehicle
with the windows closed is
dangerous. They can be
overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries
or even death from heat stroke.
Never leave a child, a helpless
adult, or a pet alone in a
vehicle, especially with the
windows closed in warm or hot
weather.
When there are children in
the rear seat use the window
lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of
the windows.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
Window Lockout
2-11
Express-Down Window
This feature is on all windows.
It allows you to lower the window
all the way without holding the
switch down.
o (Window Lockout): This button
is located on the driver’s door
armrest. Slide the switch forward to
turn the lockout feature on. The
rear windows can only be opened or
closed by the driver window
switches. The light on the button
indicates the feature is in use. Press
again to turn off.
Press the front of the switch to
the second position and release.
If you want to stop the window as
it is lowering, briefly pull up the
switch.
Press and hold the unlock button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lower all of the
Sun Visors
Pull the visor toward you, or move it
to the side to help reduce glare.
The window switches are located on
each of the doors.
windows from outside the vehicle.
To lower a window, press the switch
down. To raise a window, pull the
switch up.
To use the lighted mirror, lift
the cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-12
Keys, Doors and Windows
Cleaning the Mirror
Outside Power Mirror(s)
Mirrors
Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with glass cleaner.
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the mirror in the center to move
it for a clearer view of behind your
vehicle.
Outside Mirror(s)
To maximize the viewing area,
adjust each mirror to see the side of
your vehicle and the area beside
and behind your vehicle.
Headlamp Glare
To reduce headlamp glare from
vehicles following from behind, pull
the lever toward you. Push the
lever forward after the vehicle glare
is gone, to return the mirror back
to the original position.
Manually fold the mirrors flat against
the side of the vehicle by pushing
them toward the vehicle’s doors.
h i (Power Mirrors): Press to
select the driver side or passenger
side mirror. Press the arrows to
move the selected mirror in
the desired direction.
Vehicles with OnStar® have three
OnStar® control buttons located at
the bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer/retailer for more information
on the system and how to subscribe
page 4-38.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys, Doors and Windows
2-13
Outside Heated Mirrors
t Vent/Open: With the sunroof in
the closed position, press to vent
the sunroof. With the sunroof in the
vent position, press to open the
sunroof. The sunshade will
Sunroof
The vehicle may have outside
heated mirrors which help clear the
condensation, snow, and ice.
< (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear
Window Defogger” under, Climate
more information.
open automatically with the sunroof.
u Close: Press to close the
sunroof. Press and hold to close
completely.
Sunshade
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switches are located in the overhead
console. To operate the sunroof,
the ignition must be turned on.
r Sunshade Open: Press to
open the sunshade.
s Sunshade Close: Press to
close the sunshade, and press
and hold to close the sunshade
completely.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-14
Keys, Doors and Windows
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storage
Cargo Cover
Your vehicle may have a cargo
cover.
3-1
Storage
Glove Box
Pull up on the handle to open the
glovebox. There may be a shelf
inside that can be removed by lifting
up on the shelf and pulling it out.
Storage
Storage
Cupholders
To remove the cover, unhook the
retaining straps from the liftgate and
pull the cover from the side guides.
Cargo Tie Downs
There is a cupholder on the front
edge of the rear seat cushion.
To open or close, press on the
cupholder.
There are four cargo tie-downs
located in the rear compartment of
the vehicle, that can be used to
secure small loads.
There is a cupholder on the rear
center console.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3-2
Storage
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-3
The main components of the
instrument panel are the:
on page 6-24. (If Equipped)
(If Equipped)
page 5-1.
page 5-3.
(If Equipped)
page 7-4.
page 8-19. (If Equipped)
on page 4-4.
on page 4-26. (If Equipped)
page 7-1.
page 4-4.
page 4-10. (Covered)
on page 6-24. (If Equipped)
M. Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder. Safety Belt
page 4-12.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-4
Instruments and Controls
Hazard Warning Flashers Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever
A tilt and telescope wheel lets the
| : Press this button located on
the instrument panel, to make the
front and rear turn signal lamps flash
on and off. This warns others that
you are having trouble. Press the
button again to turn the flashers off.
steering wheel position be adjusted.
While the hazard warning flashers
are on, the turn signals do not work.
An indicator light on the hazard
warning flasher button comes on
whenever the ignition is turned on.
The lever on the left side of the
steering column includes the
following:
If the airbags are deployed, the
hazard warning flashers turn
on automatically. Press the
button twice to turn them off.
The adjustment lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
G : Turn and Lane-Change
Signals.
It allows the steering column to be
moved up or down and in or out.
Horn
2 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer.
Press the horn symbol in the middle
of the steering wheel to sound
the horn.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
J : Cruise Control (If Equipped).
Flash-to-Pass Feature.
Information for these features is on
the pages following.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-5
With cruise control, a speed of about
Cruise Control
9 (On/Off): Press and hold the
button on the back end of the cruise
control lever, to turn the cruise
control system on or off. The CC
on or CC off message will appear on
the instrument panel cluster at the
odometer display to show that the
cruise control system is on or off.
25 mph (40 km/h) or more can be
maintained without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really
help on long trips. Cruise control
does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
{ CAUTION
Cruise control can be
dangerous where you cannot
drive safely at a steady speed.
So, do not use your cruise
control on winding roads or
in heavy traffic.
A J (Set/Accelerate): Press
to set a speed and to accelerate
the speed.
Cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads.
On such roads, fast changes
in tire traction can cause
excessive wheel slip, and you
could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery
roads.
B W (Resume/Coast): Press to
resume a set speed and to decrease
the speed.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the turn signal/
multifunction lever on the left
side of the steering wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-6
Instruments and Controls
Setting Cruise Control
1. Press J and the current speed
is stored and maintained.
For safety reasons the cruise
control cannot be turned on until
the brake has been applied once.
2. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal. The J indicator light on
the instrument panel cluster turns
on after the cruise control has
been set to the desired speed.
With automatic transmission, only
use cruise control in DRIVE (D).
Press the On/Off button to turn on
the cruise control. A message briefly
appears on the instrument panel
cluster at the odometer display
when the cruise control has been
turned on.
The cruise control automatically
disengages under the following
conditions:
CC Off Message
•
The vehicle speed drops below
25 mph (40 km/h).
•
•
The brake is applied.
{ CAUTION
The clutch pedal is applied
(for manual transmission
vehicles).
If you leave your cruise control
on when you are not using
cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you
do not want to. You could be
startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch
off until you want to use cruise
control.
•
•
The automatic transmission is in
NEUTRAL (N).
The On/Off button is pressed.
CC On Message
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-7
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control will work
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. While going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle’s speed. While going
downhill, you might have to brake
or shift to a lower gear to keep the
vehicle’s speed down. Of course,
applying the brake turns off the
cruise control.
Once the vehicle speed reaches
about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more and
the cruise control is on, press W.
The vehicle returns to the previous
speed selected before the cruise
was disengaged.
•
Press and hold W until the
desired lower speed is reached,
then release it.
•
To reduce vehicle speed in
small increments, briefly
The stored speed is deleted if the
ignition is turned off.
press W repeatedly. Each time
this is done, the vehicle speed
decreases by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
When the W button is released
the current speed is stored
and maintained.
•
Press and hold J until the
desired speed is reached,
then release it.
Ending Cruise Control
There are several ways to end
cruise control:
Passing Another Vehicle
While Using Cruise Control
•
To increase vehicle speed
in small increments, briefly
•
•
•
Step lightly on the brake or
clutch pedal.
The automatic transmission is
placed in NEUTRAL (N).
press J repeatedly. Each
time this is done, the vehicle
speed increase by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) without using the
accelerator pedal.
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When
the accelerator pedal is released,
the vehicle will return to the
previously set cruise speed.
Press the 9 button.
Erasing Speed Memory
When the J button is released
the current speed is stored
and maintained.
The cruise control set speed
memory is erased when the cruise
control or the ignition is turned off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-8
Instruments and Controls
To signal a lane change, raise or
lower the lever until the arrow starts
to flash, and then release the lever.
Do not move the lever past the
detent. The turn signal will
automatically flash three times
and turn off.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
The turn signal has two upward and
downward positions to signal a turn
or a lane change.
This indicator light on the instrument
panel cluster is on while the high
beam headlamps are on.
To cancel it before turning, move
the lever slightly in either direction.
Do not past the detent.
Flash-to-Pass
Pull the turn signal/multifunction
lever towards you to flash the high
beams from low beam.
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
To signal a turn, move the lever all
the way up or down, past the detent.
The lever returns to its starting
position when released.
2 3 (Headlamp High/Low
Beam Changer): To change the
headlamps from low to high beam,
push the multifunction lever towards
the instrument panel. To return to
low-beam headlamps, push the lever
towards the instrument panel again
or pull the lever toward you. Then
release it.
An arrow on the instrument panel
cluster flashes in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-9
For a single wipe pull the lever
Windshield Wipers
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If the
wiper blades are frozen to the
windshield, gently loosen or thaw
them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or
blade inserts. See Windshield Wiper
down from the off position. The lever
will return to its original position.
For more cycles, hold the lever
down before releasing it.
RainSense™ Wipers
There is a moisture sensor mounted
on the windshield next to the inside
rearview mirror. When active, the
sensor is able to detect moisture on
the windshield and automatically
control the frequency of the wipes
according to the weather conditions.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent
an overload.
The lever on the right side of the
steering column operates the
windshield wipers. Push up or pull
down on the lever to place it in
one of the following positions.
To turn on the RainSense feature,
the wipers must be set to the
intermittent delay setting on
the windshield wiper lever.
[ (High): For rapid wiping cycles.
To turn off RainSense, move the
lever downwards.
— (Low): For slow, steady wiping
cycles.
Notice: Going through an
automatic car wash with the
wipers on can damage them.
Turn the wipers off when going
through an automatic car wash.
-- (Intermittent/RainSense™):
See RainSense™ wipers below.
9 (Off): Turns off the wipers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-10
Instruments and Controls
To turn the rear wiper on or off,
push the windshield wiper lever.
Windshield Washer
Accessory Power
Outlet(s)
The 12-volt accessory power outlets
can be used to connect electrical
equipment, such as a cellular phone.
To turn on the rear washer, hold the
windshield wiper lever toward the
front of the vehicle to spray the rear
window.
{ CAUTION
In freezing weather, do not use
your washer until the windshield
is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on
the windshield, blocking your
vision.
There may be a accessory power
outlet located inside the console
below the climate controls.
The rear wiper turns on
automatically when the windshield
wiper is turned on and the shift lever
is in REVERSE (R).
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment on for extended
periods will drain the battery.
Always turn off electrical
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
The rear window washer uses the
same fluid bottle as the windshield
washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the
windshield washer. If washer fluid
sprays onto the windshield but not
the rear window, check the fluid
level. See Windshield Washer
Pull the windshield wiper lever
toward you to spray washer fluid
on the windshield. The wipers will
run for a few cycles to clear the
windshield. For more wash cycles,
pull the lever forward and hold.
Certain electrical accessories may
not be compatible with the accessory
power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses.
If there is a problem, see your
dealer/retailer for additional
information on the accessory
power outlet.
Rear Window Wiper/
Washer
For vehicles with the rear wiper/
washer feature, it is turned on by
moving the windshield wiper lever.
For information on replacing the
rear wiper blades, see Windshield
page 9-21.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-11
Notice: Adding any electrical
equipment to your vehicle
Gages can indicate when there may
be or is a problem with one of the
vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together
to indicate a problem with the
vehicle.
Warning Lights,
Gages, and Indicators
This section describes the warning
lights and gages on the vehicle.
may damage it or keep other
components from working as they
should. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Check
with your dealer/retailer before
adding electrical equipment.
Warning lights and gages can signal
that something is wrong before it
becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement.
Paying attention to the warning lights
and gages could prevent injury.
When one of the warning lights
comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gages
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains
what to do. Follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can
be costly and even dangerous.
When adding electrical equipment,
be sure to follow the installation
instructions included with the
equipment.
Warning lights come on when there
may be or is a problem with one
of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when
the engine is started to indicate they
are working.
Notice: Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage
not covered by your warranty.
Do not hang any type of
accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-12
Instruments and Controls
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how the vehicle is running. You will know how fast
you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive safely and
economically.
United States Base Automatic Transmission version shown, Canada, Manual Transmission and Uplevel
similar
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-13
remaining distance that can be
driven until service is required.
page 9-9 and the index of the Saturn
Astra Limited Warranty, Maintenance
and Owner Assistance Information
Manual.
Speedometer and
Odometer
The speedometer lets you see your
speed in both miles per hour (mph)
or kilometers per hour (km/h).
Trip Odometer(s)
The trip odometer, located at the
center of the instrument panel
cluster, tells how far the vehicle
has been driven since the trip
odometer was set to zero.
The odometer shows how far
your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles or kilometers.
To reset the trip odometer, hold the
reset stem, located to the right of
the speedometer, for approximately
one second while the trip odometer
is displayed. The engine must
be turned on.
Tachometer
If your vehicle needs a new
odometer installed, the new one will
be set to the mileage total of the old
odometer. If it cannot, it will be set at
zero and a label must be put on the
driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was
installed. If the mileage is unknown,
the label should then indicate
Service Display
The vehicle may have a display
above the odometer that shows
when service is needed. The number
that displays with “INSP” is the
The tachometer displays the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
“previous mileage unknown.”
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-14
Instruments and Controls
This cycle repeats if the driver
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving.
Safety Belt Reminders
Airbag Readiness Light
This light tells you if there is an
electrical problem. The system check
includes the airbag sensor, the
pretensioners, the airbag modules,
the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system,
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
If the driver’s belt is already buckled,
neither the light nor chime will
come on.
There is a Driver Safety Belt
Reminder Light on the instrument
panel cluster.
Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
When the engine is started this light
and chime will come on and stay on
for several seconds to remind people
to fasten their safety belts. The light
will also begin to flash.
If your vehicle has this light, it will
operate the same as the Safety Belt
Reminder Light except that it is
meant for the front passenger.
This light will come on and stay
on for several seconds when you
start your vehicle. Then the light
should go out.
If the passenger’s safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Passenger Airbag Status
4-15
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after you start the vehicle or comes
on when your are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have
your vehicle serviced right away.
Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. The rearview
mirror has a passenger airbag
status indicator.
{ CAUTION
Canada
If the airbag readiness light
stays on after the vehicle is
started, it means the airbag
system may not be working
properly. The airbags in the
vehicle may not inflate in a
crash, or they could even
inflate without a crash.
When you start the vehicle, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after
several more seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let
you know the status of the right
front passenger’s frontal and
United States
To help avoid injury, have the
vehicle serviced right away.
seat-mounted side impact airbags.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-16
Instruments and Controls
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact airbag
are enabled (may inflate).
CAUTION (Continued)
CAUTION (Continued)
This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat if the airbag is
turned on.
guarantee that an airbag will
not deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is or airbags are off.
{ CAUTION
If the on indicator comes on
when you have a rear-facing
child restraint installed in the
right front passenger’s seat,
it means that the passenger
sensing system has not turned
off the passenger’s frontal
airbag and seat-mounted side
impact airbag (if equipped).
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag and seat-mounted
side impact airbag. See Passenger
more on this, including important
safety information.
{ CAUTION
Even though the passenger
sensing system is designed
to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag and
seat-mounted side impact
airbag (if equipped) if the
system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is
fail-safe, and no one can
injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-17
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the
passenger sensing system.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning
Light
See your dealer/retailer for service.
{ CAUTION
This light comes on briefly when the
ignition is turned on, but the engine is
not running, as a check to show the
light is working. It should go out
when the engine is started.
United States
Canada
If the airbag readiness light in
the instrument panel cluster
ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be
wrong with the airbag system.
If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly,
because an adult-size person
sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have
the protection of the airbag(s).
on page 4-14 for more on this,
including important safety
information.
This light should come on briefly
when the ignition is turned on.
If it does not come on, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if
there is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes
on while driving, there may be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer/retailer. Driving while this
light is on could drain the battery.
When the ignition is on, the brake
system warning light will come on
when the parking brake is set.
The light will stay on if the parking
brake does not release fully. If it
stays on after the parking brake is
fully released, there is a brake
problem. Have your brake system
inspected immediately.
If a short distance must be driven
with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-18
Instruments and Controls
If the light comes on while driving,
a chime will sound. Pull off the road
and stop. The pedal might be harder
to push or go closer to the floor.
It might also take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the vehicle
towed for service. See Towing Your
3. Turn off the ignition.
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
4. Then restart the engine.
If the light remains on after resetting
the system or comes on again while
driving, your vehicle needs service.
The antilock brakes are not working
properly and there might be a
problem stopping the vehicle. Pull
off the road and stop. It may take
longer to stop the vehicle. If the light
is still on, have the vehicle towed for
service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 9-72 for more information.
{ CAUTION
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
light will come on briefly, as a check,
when you start your vehicle.
The brake system may not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to
an accident. If the light is still
on after the vehicle has been
pulled off the road and carefully
stopped, have the vehicle
towed for service.
If it does not, have your vehicle
serviced so that the light works
properly when it needs to.
{ CAUTION
If the light stays on longer than a
few seconds after you start your
engine, or comes on and stays on
while you are driving, try resetting
the system. To reset the system:
Your brake system may not be
working properly if the Antilock
Brake System (ABS) light is on.
Driving with the ABS light on
can lead to an accident. If the
light is still on after you have
pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle
towed for service.
1. If you are driving, pull over when
it is safe to do so. It may take
longer to stop the vehicle.
2. Place the vehicle in PARK (P).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-19
StabiliTrak® Indicator
Light
When the system is active, the light
will flash while the system helps
control the vehicle. You may also
feel or hear the system working.
This is normal.
Notice: Driving with the engine
coolant temperature warning light
on could cause your vehicle to
overheat. See Engine Overheating
on page 9-15. Your vehicle could
be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never
drive with the engine coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
This light comes on briefly when the
ignition is turned on as a system
check. If it does not, take the vehicle
to your dealer/retailer for service.
temperature warning light on.
For vehicles with this light, it should
come on briefly when the ignition
is turned on.
Tire Pressure Light
If the light does not come on, have
it fixed so it will be ready to warn
if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving there may be a problem
with the StabiliTrak system and your
vehicle may need service. When this
light is on, the StabiliTrak system
does not assist in controlling the
vehicle. Adjust your driving
accordingly.
page 8-19 for more information.
This light comes on briefly as a
check when the ignition is turned on.
This light comes on and stays on
when one or more of the vehicle’s
tires are significantly underinflated.
If this light comes on and stays lit,
the engine has overheated.
If this happens pull over and see
Engine Overheating on page 9-15
for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-20
Instruments and Controls
Stop and check the tires as soon as
it is safe to do so. If underinflated,
inflate to the proper pressure.
information.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, after a while, the emission
controls might not work as well,
the vehicle’s fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine
might not run as smoothly. This
could lead to costly repairs that
might not be covered by the
warranty.
This light flashes for approximately
one minute and then stays on when
the system detects a malfunction.
on page 9-48 for more information.
This light comes on briefly, as a
check to show it is working, when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN. If the
light does not come on, see your
dealer/retailer.
Notice: Modifications made to
the engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of the
original tires with other than those
of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect the
vehicle’s emission controls and
can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems
could lead to costly repairs not
covered by the warranty. This
could also result in a failure
to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
If the light stays on it indicates that
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
Check Engine Light
Malfunctions often are indicated by
the system before any problem is
apparent. Heeding the light can
prevent more serious damage to the
vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist the service technician in
correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
A computer system called OBD II
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It makes sure that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-21
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has been
detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
•
Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality
causes the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and may
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
An emission system malfunction
might be corrected by doing
the following:
•
Make sure the fuel cap is fully
page 8-37. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap
has been left off or improperly
installed. A loose or missing fuel
cap allows fuel to evaporate into
the atmosphere. A few driving
trips with the cap properly
The following can prevent more
serious damage to the vehicle:
If one or more of these conditions
occurs, change the fuel brand
used. It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to
turn the light off.
•
•
•
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the light continues to flash, when
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least
10 seconds, and restart the engine.
If the light is still flashing, follow the
previous steps and see your dealer/
retailer for service as soon as
possible.
page 8-35.
installed should turn the light off.
•
If the vehicle has been driven
through a deep puddle of water,
the vehicle’s electrical system
might be wet. The condition is
usually corrected when the
electrical system dries out.
A few driving trips should turn
the light off.
If none of the above have made the
light turn off, have your dealer/retailer
check the vehicle. The dealer/retailer
has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical
or electrical problems that might
have developed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-22
Instruments and Controls
replaced or if the battery has
run down. The diagnostic system
is designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during
normal driving. This can take
several days of routine driving.
If this has been done and the
vehicle still does not pass the
inspection for lack of OBD system
readiness, your dealer/retailer can
prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance may damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments have or might begin
programs to inspect the emission
control equipment on your vehicle.
Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things to know to
help the vehicle pass an inspection:
Oil Pressure Light
•
The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the check engine
light is on or not working properly.
This light comes on briefly when the
ignition is turned on as a check to
be sure it works. If it does not, have
the vehicle serviced.
{ CAUTION
•
The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the OBD (on-board
diagnostic) system determines
that critical emission control
systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. The vehicle would
be considered not ready for
inspection. This can happen
if the battery has recently been
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches
fire. You or others could be
burned. Check the oil as soon
as possible and have the
vehicle serviced.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
Fog Lamp Light
4-23
Low Oil Level Light
Winter Driving Mode
Light
This light should come on briefly
when the ignition is turned on as
a check to let you know that the
light is working.
The fog lamp light will come on
when the fog lamps are in use.
This light will come on when the
winter driving mode feature is in use.
The light will go out when the fog
lamps are turned off. See Fog
information.
When you turn off the winter driving
mode feature, the light will go out.
If it stays on, your vehicle may need
service. See your dealer/retailer.
See “Winter Driving Mode” under
on page 8-5 for more information.
If this light comes on and stays on
while the engine is running, it means
your engine is low on oil. You need
to check the oil level as soon as
for further information.
Notice: Lack of proper engine
oil maintenance may damage the
engine. The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this
manual for changing engine oil.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-24
Instruments and Controls
Exterior Lamps Off
Reminder
Highbeam On Light
Service Vehicle Soon
Light
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use.
This light comes on whenever the
exterior lights are off.
This light should come one briefly
when the ignition is turned on
as a check to let you know that
the light is working.
information.
page 5-1 for more information.
This light will come on if a condition
exists that may require the vehicle
to be taken in for service.
Cruise Control Light
Door Ajar Light
If the light comes on and stays
on, see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
This light comes on whenever you
set the cruise control.
This light will come on when a door
or liftgate is open. Before driving,
check that all doors are properly
closed.
The light goes out when the cruise
control is turned off or disengaged.
for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-25
The arrow on the fuel gage points
to the side of the vehicle with
the fuel door.
Fuel Gage
Low Fuel Warning Light
Here are five things that some
owners ask about. These are normal
and do not indicate a problem with
your fuel gage:
•
At the service station, the gas
pump shuts off before the gage
reads full.
Your fuel gage tells you about how
much fuel you have left, when
the ignition is on.
This light, below the fuel gage,
should come on briefly when the
ignition is turned on as a check to let
you know that the light is working.
•
•
•
•
It takes a little more or less fuel to
fill up than the gage indicated.
When the indicator nears empty,
the low fuel warning light will come
on. You still have a little fuel left,
but you should get more soon.
This light also comes on when
the fuel tank is low on fuel. When
you add fuel the light should go off.
If it does not, have your vehicle
serviced.
The indicator moves a little when
you turn a corner or speed up.
The gage goes back to empty
when you turn off the ignition.
on page 4-25 for more information.
The vehicle is driven or parked on
a grade.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-26
Instruments and Controls
on page 6-1 for more information.
On vehicles with the base level DIC,
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
Vehicles with a Driver Information
Center (DIC) can display:
Q displays when the outside air
temperature is cold enough to
create icy road conditions.
On vehicles with the uplevel DIC,
“Slippery road” displays.
•
•
•
Time
An F in the display indicates a fault.
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Outside temperature
The road surface may already be
icy even though the DIC shows
a few degrees above freezing.
Adjust your driving accordingly.
Date or audio system, if it is
turned on
Outside Air Temperature
The DIC shows the temperature
outside of the vehicle in either
degrees Fahrenheit or degrees
Celsius. A fall in temperature
is displayed immediately, while a
rise in temperature is displayed
after a short delay.
•
•
Trip computer, on vehicles with
this feature
Warning messages
The type of information and how it is
displayed depends on the equipment
of the vehicle and the settings of the
trip computer and audio system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-27
DIC Operation and Displays (Base Level DIC
and Audio)
On some vehicles, menu options
can be selected with the left
thumbwheel on the steering wheel:
1. Turn the thumbwheel down to
advance to the next menu item.
CD 30 with MP3 Player shown, without MP3 Player similar
If the vehicle has the base level
DIC, the following information
explains how the system works.
Selecting Functions
Turn the thumbwheel up to return
to the previous menu item.
Functions and settings of some
equipment can be accessed
through the DIC. You can use the
thumbwheel, if the vehicle has one,
or the buttons on the audio system
as described following.
2. Press the thumbwheel to select
the menu item.
The available menu options are
then shown in order on the display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-28
Instruments and Controls
On some vehicles, if a warning
message appears, the display
is blocked from other functions.
page 4-37 for information on
acknowledging the message.
The following functions are
available:
Ignition Logic
If the vehicle has this feature,
for more information.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Time, setting hours
Time, setting minutes
Date, setting day
Language Selection
To select the display language for
some functions:
Date, setting month
Date, setting year
Ignition Logic
System Settings
1. Select language from the
Settings menu.
To enter the Settings menu:
1. Press SETTINGS on the audio
system.
Language selection
Setting units of measure
2. Make the desired selection.
Audio or System will appear.
Setting Units of Measure
Setting Date and Time
2. Press the left arrow button on
the audio system or use the
thumbwheel on the steering
wheel, if the vehicle has one,
to reach menu item System.
To select which units of measure
are to be used:
To set the date and time:
1. Select time and date from the
Settings menu.
1. Select units from the
Settings menu.
2. Make the desired selections.
2. Make the desired selection.
After pressing the OK button,
the first function of the System
menu is shown.
The setting is saved when
the menu item is exited.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-29
The functions are displayed in the
following order:
Average Consumption
Trip Computer
This display shows the approximate
average miles per gallon (mpg) or
liters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).
This number is calculated based
on the number of mpg (l/100 km)
recorded since the last time this
menu item was reset.
The vehicle may have a trip
computer. The trip computer
provides information on driving
data. This information is continually
recorded and evaluated
electronically. If power has been
interrupted or if the battery voltage
has dropped too low, the values
stored in the trip computer will
be lost.
Instantaneous Consumption
This display shows the current fuel
economy at a particular moment
and will change frequently as driving
conditions change. This display
shows the instantaneous fuel
economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or
liters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).
The measurement can be reset to
zero at any time and restarted.
See “Reset” later in this section.
The metric display changes
depending on speed:
To access trip computer vehicle
data, do one of the following:
Trip Consumption
•
Below 8 mph (13 km/h), displays
in l/h.
This display shows the number of
gallons (gal) or liters (l) of fuel
used since the last reset.
•
Press the BC button on the audio
system.
•
Above 8 mph (13 km/h), displays
in l/100 km.
•
Press the left thumbwheel, if your
vehicle has this feature, on the
steering wheel.
The measurement can be reset to
zero at any time and restarted.
See “Reset” later in this section.
This screen cannot be reset.
Once an audio function has been
selected, the rows of the trip
computer function are displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-30
Instruments and Controls
Average Speed
Range
in the fuel tank. This estimate will
change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and
making frequent stops, this display
may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway, the
number may change even though
the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different
driving conditions produce different
fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy
than city driving. Fuel range cannot
be reset.
This display shows the average
speed of the vehicle in miles
per hour (mph) or kilometers
per hour (km/h). This average is
calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since
the last reset of this value.
This display shows the approximate
number of remaining miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) the vehicle
can be driven without refueling.
The message “Range” displays
if less than 31 mi (50 km) can be
driven with the fuel remaining in the
tank. The message “Refuel!” displays
when approximately 19 mi (30 km)
can be driven with the fuel remaining
in the tank. With less than 19 mi
(30 km) worth of fuel remaining the
range display will show “- -” once
the “Refuel!” message has been
acknowledged.
The measurement can be reset to
zero at any time and restarted.
See “Reset” later in this section.
Distance Travelled
This display shows the current
distance traveled in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) since the last
reset.
Stop Watch
This display can be used as a timer.
page 4-37 for information on
acknowledging the message.
To start or stop the timer, press
the right arrow on the audio system.
The measurement can be reset to
zero at any time and restarted.
See “Reset” later in this section.
To reset the timer, press the left
arrow until the value returns to zero.
The fuel range estimate is based
on an average of the vehicle’s fuel
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining
If your vehicle has the left
thumbwheel on the steering wheel,
you can start or stop the timer
by pressing the thumbwheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-31
Reset
DIC Operation and Displays (Uplevel DIC and Audio)
The following trip computer
information can be reset:
•
•
•
•
Average consumption
Trip consumption
Average speed
Distance travelled
To reset the value:
1. Select the desired trip computer
information.
2. Press the OK button on the
audio system, or press the
left thumbwheel, if your vehicle
has this feature, on the steering
wheel:
CDC 40
If the vehicle has the uplevel DIC,
the following information explains
how the system works.
Selecting Functions
Functions and settings of some
equipment can be accessed through
the DIC.
•
To reset the current value,
press and hold briefly.
•
To reset all values, press for
six seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-32
Instruments and Controls
On some vehicles, if a warning
message appears, the display
is blocked from other functions.
page 4-37 for information on
acknowledging the message.
For each functional area there is a
main page (Main), which is selected
at the top edge of the display:
•
•
Audio
Trip computer, if your vehicle has
this feature
On some vehicles, menu
options can be selected with
the multifunction knob on the
audio system:
Menu options can be selected
with the left thumbwheel on
the steering wheel:
See “Trip Computer” later in this
section for more information.
1. Turn the thumbwheel down to
advance to the next menu item.
For Audio functions, see Audio
information.
1. Turn the multifunction knob
until the desired menu item is
highlighted.
Turn the thumbwheel up to return
to the previous menu item.
2. Press the multifunction knob to
select the menu item.
2. Press the thumbwheel to select
the menu item.
To exit a menu, turn the
multifunction knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to “Return”
or “Main”, then press the knob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-33
Setting Date and Time
Setting Units of Measure
System Settings
To set the date and time:
To select which units of measure
are to be used:
To enter the Settings menu, do one
of the following:
1. Select Time, Date from the
Settings menu.
1. Select Units from the
Settings menu.
•
Press MAIN, if your vehicle has
this feature, on the audio system.
The menu for Time, Date is
displayed.
The available units are displayed.
2. Make the desired selection.
•
Press the SETTINGS button on
the audio system.
2. Select the menu items required.
3. Make the desired selection.
The Settings menu will appear.
When selected, a O appears
next to the item.
The functions are displayed in the
following order:
Language Selection
Adjusting Contrast
To select the display language for
some functions:
1. Time, Date
2. Language
3. Units
The vehicle may have this feature.
To adjust the contrast:
1. Select Language from the
Settings menu.
1. Select Contrast from the
Settings menu.
The available languages are
displayed.
4. Contrast
The menu for Contrast is
displayed.
5. Day / Night
6. Ign. (Ignition) logic
2. Make the desired selection.
2. Make the desired selection.
When selected, a r appears
next to the item.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-34
Instruments and Controls
Day / Night
The functions are displayed in the
following order:
Trip Computer
The vehicle may have this feature.
The display can be adjusted to
best match the lighting conditions.
To adjust this setting:
The vehicle may have a trip
computer. The trip computer
provides information on driving
data. This information is
Range
This display shows the approximate
number of remaining miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) the vehicle
can be driven without refueling.
continually recorded and
1. Select Day / Night from the
Settings menu.
evaluated electronically. If power
has been interrupted or if the battery
voltage has dropped too low, the
values stored in the trip computer
will be lost.
The available options are
displayed:
The message “Range” displays if
less than 31 miles (50 km) can be
driven with the fuel remaining in
the tank.
•
Auto: Adjusts the display
automatically based on
the lighting conditions.
The trip computer main page
provides information on range
and instantaneous consumption.
page 4-37 for information on
acknowledging the message.
•
•
Day: Black or colored text on
a light background.
To access other trip computer
vehicle data, do one of the following:
Night: White or colored text
on a dark background.
The fuel range estimate is based
on an average of the vehicle’s fuel
economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. This estimate will
•
•
•
Press the BC button on the
audio system, if your vehicle
has this feature.
2. Make the desired selection.
When selected, a O appears next
to the item.
Press the left thumbwheel, if your
vehicle has this feature, on the
steering wheel.
change if driving conditions change.
Ignition Logic
If the vehicle has this feature, see
Audio System(s) on page 6-1
for more information.
Select the trip computer menu
front display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-35
For example, if driving in traffic and
making frequent stops, this display
may read one number, but if the
vehicle is driven on a freeway,
the number may change even
though the same amount of fuel
is in the fuel tank. This is because
different driving conditions produce
different fuel economies. Generally,
freeway driving produces better
fuel economy than city driving.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
The metric display changes
depending on speed:
Average Speed
This display shows the average
speed of the vehicle in miles per
hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h). This average is
calculated based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since
the last reset of this value.
•
Below 8 mph (13 km/h), displays
in l/h.
•
Above 8 mph (13 km/h), displays
in l/100 km.
This screen cannot be reset.
The measurement can be reset to
zero at any time and restarted.
See “Reset” later in this section.
Distance Travelled
This display shows the current
distance traveled in either miles (mi)
or kilometers (km) since the last
reset.
Trip Consumption
Instantaneous Consumption
This display shows the number
of gallons (gal) or liters (l) of
fuel used since the last reset.
This display shows the current fuel
economy at a particular moment and
will change frequently as driving
conditions change. This display
shows the instantaneous fuel
economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or
liters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).
The measurement can be reset to
zero at any time and restarted.
See “Reset” later in this section.
The measurement can be reset to
zero at any time and restarted.
See “Reset” later in this section.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-36
Instruments and Controls
Average Consumption
The desired stop watch displays can
be selected from the Options menu,
if your vehicle has this feature:
To reset the value:
This display shows the approximate
average miles per gallon (mpg) or
liters per 100 kilometers (l/100 km).
This number is calculated based
on the number of mpg (l/100 km)
recorded since the last time this
menu item was reset.
1. Select BC 1 or BC 2 from the trip
computer menu.
Driving Time excl. Stops: The
time the vehicle is in motion is
recorded. Stationary time is not
included.
The information of the two
trip computers can be reset
separately, making it possible
to evaluate data from different
time periods.
Driving Time incl. Stops: The time
the vehicle is in motion is recorded
along with the time the vehicle is
stationary with the key in the ignition.
The measurement can be reset to
zero at any time and restarted.
See “Reset” later in this section.
2. To reset, do one of the following:
•
Select the desired trip
computer information.
Timer
Travel Time: Measurement of
the time from manual activation,
by selecting Start, to manual
deactivation, by selecting Reset.
The value for the selected
function will be reset and
recalculated.
This display can be used as a timer.
Select Timer from the menu.
The Timer menu will display.
•
To reset all information of
a trip computer, select All
values.
Reset
To start the timer, select Start.
To reset the timer, select Reset.
The following trip computer
information can be reset:
After resetting, dashes will display
for the trip computer information
selected. The recalculated values
will display after a brief delay.
•
•
•
•
Distance travelled
Average speed
Trip consumption
Average consumption
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-37
Some messages may not require
immediate action, but you can
acknowledge that you received the
messages and to clear them from the
display by doing one of the following:
Some messages cannot be cleared
from the DIC display because they
are more urgent. These messages
require action before they can
be cleared. You should take any
messages that appear on the display
seriously and remember that clearing
the messages will only make the
messages disappear, not correct
the problem.
DIC Warnings and
Messages (Base and
Uplevel Systems)
Messages are displayed on the DIC
to notify the driver that the status of
the vehicle has changed and that
some action may be needed by
the driver to correct the condition.
Multiple messages may appear
one after another.
•
Press the OK button on the base
level audio system.
•
Press the multifunction knob, if
your vehicle has this feature,
on the uplevel audio system.
Warning messages for the uplevel
DIC follow. On the base level
DIC, messages appear in an
abbreviated form.
•
Press the left thumbwheel, if your
vehicle has this feature, on the
steering wheel.
The DIC monitors some fluid levels,
battery of the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, the theft-deterrent
system on vehicles with this feature,
the brake light switch, and important
exterior lights, including wiring and
fuses.
If there are several warning
messages, acknowledge them
one at a time.
Brakelight check - - -
This message displays when there
is a problem with the vehicle lighting.
The source of the problem is
displayed as text. For example,
“Brakelight check right”.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-38
Instruments and Controls
OnStar® System
Brakelight switch check
Safeguard check
This message displays when the
brake lamp does not come on
when the brake is applied. Have
your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately.
This message displays when there
is a problem with the theft-deterrent
system. Have the system serviced
by your dealer/retailer immediately.
Washer Fluid Level
(Base Level) or Washing
Water Level (Uplevel)
Coolant level check
This message displays when the
engine coolant level is low. Have
the cooling system serviced by your
dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
OnStar uses several innovative
technologies and live advisors to
provide you with a wide range of
safety, security, information, and
convenience services. If your airbags
deploy, the system is designed to
make an automatic call to OnStar
Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be
sent to your location. If you lock your
keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send
a signal to unlock your doors. If you
need roadside assistance, press the
OnStar button and they can contact
Roadside Service for you.
This message displays when the
vehicle’s windshield washer fluid is
low. When the washer fluid level is
low, the rear window washer system
is deactivated. Fill the windshield
washer fluid reservoir to the proper
level as soon as possible. See
page 9-20.
Remote Control Battery
check
This message displays if the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. Replace
the battery in the transmitter.
See “Battery Replacement” under
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-39
OnStar service is provided to you
subject to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions. You may cancel your
OnStar service at any time by
contacting OnStar. A complete
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the
OnStar Terms and Conditions are
included in the vehicle’s OnStar
Subscriber glove box literature.
For more information, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press the
OnStar button to speak with an
OnStar advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
Available Services with
Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar,
the Safe & Sound Plan, or the
Directions & Connections Plan
is included for one year from the
date of purchase. You can extend
this plan beyond the first year,
or upgrade to the Directions &
Connections Plan. For more
information, press the OnStar
button to speak with an advisor.
Some OnStar services (such as
Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may
not be available until you register
with OnStar.
•
Automatic Notification of Airbag
Deployment
•
•
•
Link to Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance
Stolen Vehicle Location
Assistance
•
•
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle
Alert
•
•
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
GM Goodwrench On Demand
Diagnostics (if equipped)
Not all OnStar features are available
on all vehicles. To check if your
vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a
full description of OnStar services
and system limitations, see the
OnStar Owner’s Guide in your
glove box or visit onstar.com.
•
•
OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
OnStar Virtual Advisor
(U.S. Only)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-40
Instruments and Controls
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
Mobility service plan in Canada,
depending on eligibility. To find out
more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s
Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visit
onstar.com or onstar.ca, or speak
with an OnStar advisor by pressing
the OnStar button or calling
How OnStar Service Works
In order to provide you with OnStar
services, your vehicle’s OnStar
system has the capability of
•
•
All Safe and Sound Plan Services
Driving Directions - Advisor
delivered or OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Navigation (If equipped)
recording and transmitting vehicle
information. This information is
automatically sent to an OnStar
Call Center at the time of an OnStar
button press, Emergency button
press or if your airbags deploy.
The vehicle information usually
includes your GPS location and,
in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the accident
that your vehicle has been involved
in. When you use the Virtual Advisor
feature of OnStar Hands-Free
Calling, your vehicle also sends
OnStar your GPS location so that we
can provide you with location-based
services.
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
•
•
RideAssist
Information and Convenience
Services
OnStar Virtual Advisor
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature
of OnStar Hands-Free Calling
that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local
traffic reports, and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and
giving a few simple voice commands,
you can browse through the various
topics. See the OnStar Owner’s
Guide for more information (Only
available in the continental U.S.).
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
eligible OnStar subscribers to make
and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is
integrated into the vehicle, and can
be used with OnStar Pre-Paid Minute
Packages. Hands-Free Calling may
also be linked to a Verizon Wireless
service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instruments and Controls
4-41
OnStar service cannot work unless
your vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area. OnStar service also
cannot work unless you are in a
place where the wireless service
provider OnStar has hired for that
area has coverage, network capacity
and reception when the service is
needed, and technology that is
compatible with the OnStar service.
Not all services are available
OnStar service that involves location
Your Responsibility
information about your vehicle
cannot work unless GPS satellite
signals are unobstructed and
available in that place as well.
You may need to increase the
volume of your radio to hear the
OnStar advisor. If the light next to the
OnStar buttons is red, this means
that your system is not functioning
properly and should be checked
by your dealer/retailer. If the light
appears clear (no light is appearing),
your OnStar subscription has
expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your
OnStar equipment is active.
Your vehicle must have a working
electrical system (including adequate
battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are
other problems OnStar cannot
control that may prevent OnStar
from providing service to you at
any particular time or place. Some
examples are damage to important
parts of your vehicle in an accident,
hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather
or wireless phone network
everywhere, particularly in remote
or enclosed areas, or at all times.
congestion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-42
Instruments and Controls
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
5-1
; (Parking Lamps): Turns on
the parking lamps together with the
following:
Lighting
Lighting
Exterior Lamps Controls
The exterior lamp control is
located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel.
•
•
•
Taillamps
Lighting
Sidemarkers
License Plate Lamps
2 (Headlamps): Turns on the
headlamps, together with the
previously listed lamps.
After 15 minutes with the ignition
switched off and the low-beam
headlamps on, the parking lamps
turn on.
Turn the exterior lamp control to the
following positions:
T (Off): Turns off the exterior lamps.
AUTO (Automatic): Turns
the exterior lamps on and off
automatically, depending upon
outside lighting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-2
Lighting
The taillamps and other lamps will
be off.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
Fog Lamps
The DRL turns off when the engine
is not running.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many
different driving conditions, but they
can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and before
sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all
vehicles first sold in Canada.
The regular headlamps or parking
lamps should be used when needed.
For vehicls, the
button is located on the instrument
panel, to the left of the steering
wheel.
Delayed Headlamps
Vehicles with headlamp exit delay,
keep the headlamps and taillamps
on for 30 seconds.
The ignition and headlamps or
parking lamps must be on to turn on
the fog lamps. The fog lamps will not
turn on if the high beam headlamps
or flash to pass are active.
To activate:
The DRL system makes the
low-beam headlamps turn on at
a reduced brightness when
1. Turn the ignition off and remove
the key from the ignition.
the following conditions are met:
Press the button to turn the fog
lamps on or off. An indicator light on
the instrument panel cluster comes
on when the fog lamps are on.
2. Open the driver door.
•
•
The engine is running.
3. Pull the multifunction lever
toward the steering wheel.
The light sensor determines it
is night and the exterior lamps
control is in the off position.
To deactivate, do either of the
following:
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be
on along with the fog lamps.
•
The light sensor determines
it is daytime.
•
•
Insert the key into the ignition.
Pull the multifunction lever toward
the steering wheel again while
the driver door is open.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lighting
Reading Lamps
5-3
Instrument Panel
Brightness
Entry Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior of the
vehicle is illuminated while entering
the vehicle. The interior lamps
turn on briefly when the door
is unlocked using the key or the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and the ignition is in
LOCK/OFF. After a few seconds
have passed, the interior lamps
will slowly fade out.
Front Reading Lamps
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): The knob with this
symbol on it is located next to the
exterior lamps control to the left of
the steering wheel. Push the knob in
all the way until it extends out and
then turn the knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to brighten or dim
the lights. Push the knob back in
when finished.
The front reading lamps, located on
the headliner, can be controlled
separately by the buttons located
near each lamp.
Dome Lamp(s)
There are two dome lamps. The rear
dome lamp turns on automatically
with the front dome lamp.
\ (On/Off): Press to turn the lamp
on or off.
+ (On/Off): Press to turn the
front dome lamp on or off while
the doors are closed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5-4
Lighting
Rear Reading Lamps
Battery Run-Down
Protection
The rear seat reading lamps can be
turned on while the ignition is on.
This feature helps prevent the
battery from being drained, if the
courtesy lamps, reading lamps, sun
visor, glovebox or rear compartment
lamp are left on. If any of these
lamps are left on, they automatically
turn off after approximately
9 (Off): Press to turn the lamp off.
R (On): Press to turn the lamp on.
Rear Compartment Lamp
The liftgate lamp turns on when the
liftgate is opened and turns off
when the liftgate is closed.
20 minutes, if the ignition is off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-1
Keeping your mind on the drive is
important for safe driving. See
Here are some ways in which you
can help avoid distraction while
driving.
Audio System(s)
Infotainment
Determine which audio system the
vehicle has and then read the
following pages to become familiar
with its features.
Audio System(s)
While your vehicle is parked:
{ CAUTION
•
•
•
Familiarize yourself with all of its
controls.
This system provides you with
far greater access to audio
stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to
entertainment tasks while
driving can cause a crash and
you or others can be injured or
killed. Always keep your eyes on
the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in
extended searching while
driving.
Familiarize yourself with its
operation.
Set up your audio system by
presetting your favorite radio
stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit,
you can tune to your favorite radio
stations using the presets and
remote control on the steering
wheel. See Audio Steering Wheel
audio system manual for more
information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-2
Infotainment
Ignition Logic
Radio(s)
When this feature is enabled it turns
the audio system on or off when
the ignition is turned on or off.
To turn the audio system on or off
with Ignition Logic:
•
Press n / R or insert a CD
to turn the audio system on.
Press n / R to turn the audio
system off when the Ignition
Logic system is disabled and
the ignition is ON/RUN.
CD 30 MP3 Shown, CD 30 Similar
OK: Press to confirm selections
•
For vehicles with OnStar®, the
audio system will only turn off
if the ignition is OFF and OnStar
is not in use when the Ignition
Logic system is enabled.
System Operation
and go to the next page in the
settings menu.
n / R (Volume/Power): Press
to turn the system on or off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
\ or ]: Press to change menu
options.
BC (Board Computer): Press to
use the Board Computer. See DIC
SOUND: Press to enter the sound
settings menu and go to the next
page in sound settings.
SETTINGS: Press to adjust system
and sound settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-3
The Ignition Logic is preset to turn
off the audio system when the
ignition is turned off. To enable or
disable Ignition Logic:
System Display
Audio Settings
The following information shows on
the system display:
The audio settings can be set
for each audio source and are
stored separately for each radio
station and the CD player.
•
FM or AM, and the current
station frequency if the radio is
active.
1. Press SETTINGS until Audio
displays.
Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
2. Press \ until System displays.
•
•
•
The station name displays if RDS
is activated.
To adjust the Bass:
3. Press OK until Ign. Logic
1. Press SOUND until Bass
appears.
ON or Ign. Logic OFF displays.
AS displays if the AS level is
activated.
4. Press \ or ] to select the
setting. The setting is saved
automatically.
2. Press \ or ] to adjust the level
from -12 through +12. The
CD displays, and the CD title
number or the CD title name
if the CD player is active.
setting is saved automatically.
•
Press SETTINGS again to
move back one level in
the menu.
•
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
•
•
MP3 displays if the CD is an
MP3 CD.
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
RDM displays if the CD is being
played in random mode.
•
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or
BC to turn on that feature.
The most recent selected audio
source plays when the audio system
is turned on and the display is lit.
The outside temperature, time,
and date display when the audio
system is turned off and the ignition
is ON/RUN, see Driver Information
Audio displays and the system
starts to play if SETTINGS, FM/AM,
CD/MP3, or BC is not pressed
within five seconds after the setting
is saved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-4
Infotainment
Audio displays and the audio
system starts to play if SETTINGS,
FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC is not
pressed within five seconds after
the setting is saved.
Adjusting the Sound Settings
To adjust the sound settings using
the SETTINGS button:
There are preset sound settings
designed for different types of music
1. Press SETTINGS until Audio
appears.
To adjust the sound settings
using the SOUND button:
2. Press OK until Sound appears.
To adjust the Treble:
1. Press SOUND until Sound
appears.
3. Press \ or ] to select between
Rock, Disco, Classic, Jazz,
Vocal, and Off. The setting is
saved automatically.
1. Press SOUND until Treble
appears.
2. Press \ or ] to select between
Rock, Disco, Classic, Jazz,
Vocal, and Off. The setting is
saved automatically.
2. Press \ or ] to adjust the level
from -12 through +12. The
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
setting is saved automatically.
•
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
•
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
•
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-5
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)
To adjust the Fade using the
SOUND button:
Speed-Dependant Volume
Control (SDVC)
To adjust the Balance using the
SOUND button:
1. Press SOUND until Fader
appears.
SDVC automatically adjusts the
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle increases
or decreases speed while driving.
1. Press SOUND until Balance
appears.
2. Press \ or ] to adjust the level
from -12 through +12. The
To adjust SDVC:
2. Press \ or ] to adjust the level
from -12 through +12. The
setting is saved automatically.
1. Press SETTINGS until Audio
appears.
•
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
setting is saved automatically.
•
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
2. Press OK until SDVC appears.
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
3. Press \ or ] to adjust the
level from 0 through 5. The
setting is saved automatically.
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
To adjust the Fade using the
SETTINGS button:
To adjust the Balance using the
SETTINGS button:
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
1. Press SETTINGS until Audio
appears.
1. Press SETTINGS until Audio
appears.
•
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
2. Press OK until Fader appears.
2. Press OK until Balance appears.
3. Press \ or ] to adjust the level
from -12 through +12. The
3. Press \ or ] to adjust the level
from -12 through +12. The setting
is saved automatically.
setting is saved automatically.
•
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
•
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-6
Infotainment
OnStar® Volume
On Volume
Using the Radio
For vehicles with OnStar, the OnStar
Volume is used to set the maximum
initial volume level for the OnStar
system when it is turned on.
The On Volume is used to set the
maximum initial volume level for the
audio system when it is turned on.
FM/AM: Press to select between
FM, FM-AS, AM, and AM-AS,
or to listen to the radio while a CD
is playing.
The maximum initial volume level is
used only if the volume level before
turning the audio system off was
higher than the maximum initial
volume level set. This will work
when the audio system has been
off for at least five minutes and the
ignition is OFF.
To set OnStar Volume:
RDS (Radio Data System): Press
to identify stations by name
instead of the radio frequency.
1. Press SETTINGS until Audio
appears.
2. Press OK until OnStar Vol.
appears.
LOC (LOCAL/DX Function): Press
to change between LOC ON or LOC
OFF. When the LOC function is on,
it searches for the strongest radio
frequency. If none is found, it
automatically search for a weaker
radio frequency. If no frequency
is found after the second search,
the radio returns to the last active
frequency. If a new station search is
not started within one minute, the low
sensitivity (LOCAL) is set when the
next search is started. When LOC
OFF is set, a search is carried out
using the high sensitivity (DX).
3. Press \ or ] to adjust the level
from -12 through 12. The setting
is saved automatically.
To set the On Volume level:
1. Press SETTINGS until Audio
appears.
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
2. Press OK until On Volume
appears.
•
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
3. Press \ or ] to adjust the level
from -12 through 12. The setting
is saved automatically.
•
Press SETTINGS again to go
back one level in the menu.
•
Press FM/AM, CD/MP3, or BC to
display that function.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-7
Finding an FM/AM Station
Automatic Station Search: Use
automatic station search when
the radio frequency is unknown.
Manual Station Search: Use
manual station search when
the radio frequency is known.
1 - 9 (Station Preset Buttons):
Press to play stations that are
programmed to the radio preset
pushbuttons.
To use manual station search:
Press \ or ] for more then
one second to have the radio search
for the next station. Seek is shown
on the display and the radio is
muted until a station is found.
•
Press and hold \ or ] until the
desired frequency is reached.
SCN (Station Preset Scan): Press
to start station preset scan. The radio
goes to the first preset station, plays
for a few seconds, then goes to the
next preset station. Press SCN again
to stop scanning preset stations.
•
Tap \ or ] until the desired
frequency is reached.
If the radio fails to locate a station,
the last active frequency is then
reset. When LOC is activated,
a search for the next strong station
is made. If it is not activated, it
searches the next receivable station.
Setting Preset Stations
The radio can store up to 36 stations
using the station preset buttons:
\ or ]: Press to find radio stations
using the automatic station search
or the manual station search.
•
•
•
•
9 FM
9 FM - AS (Autostore)
9 AM
9 AM - AS (Autostore)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-8
Infotainment
Radio stations can be stored
manually, and by using Autostore.
Loading a CD
Using the CD Player
Display Options
To load a CD, insert the CD label
side up in the CD player. The CD
player pulls the CD in automatically.
To manually store preset stations:
The display can be changed
depending on what type of CD
is in the CD player. The display
options are:
1. Select FM or AM and tune to the
desired radio station.
•
The display shows Read CD, the
CD symbol and the number of CD
tracks.
2. Press and hold one of the nine
station preset buttons, the radio
briefly mutes and displays the
previously stored station. The
new station has been stored
when the radio begins playing
again.
Audio CD without CD text:
•
When the first track starts to play,
the display shows track 1 and the
playing time.
•
Track number and playing time.
Audio CD with CD text:
•
•
•
•
Track title
Playing a CD
Artist name
CD/MP3: Press to play a CD or
MP3 CD that is already loaded into
the CD player while the radio is
playing. See “Using an MP3” in the
owner manual index.
3. Repeat the steps for each radio
station to be stored.
Tack number and playing time
CD name
AS (Autostore): Press to
automatically store the nine
strongest stations in the selected
radio band.
To change the display:
1. Press CD/MP3 twice, CD info
appears on the display.
\ or ]: Press to go to the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
fast forward or fast rewind within
a track and the CD plays at a higher
speed and a reduced volume.
To use Autostore:
2. Press \ or ] to select the
1. Select FM or AM.
display type.
2. Press and hold AS until a beep
is heard.
3. After about five seconds, the
selected display type is saved.
Z : Press to eject a CD, Eject CD
is displayed and the radio begins
playing.
3. The radio begins storing the
stations in the nine preset
button locations.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-9
Random: Press CD/MP3 three
times to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential order. Press
\ or ] to select between Random
on and Random off. RDM shows on
the display when random is in use.
MP3 CDs recorded without ID3 tags
display:
Playing an MP3
CD/MP3: Press to play an MP3 CD
that is already loaded into the CD
player while the radio is playing.
•
•
•
File name
Track number and playing time
Album name
Selecting a Track
MP3 CDs recorded with ID3 tags
display:
\ or ]: Press to go to the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
fast forward or fast rewind within a
track. During fast forward, the
CD plays at a higher speed and a
reduced volume.
Using an MP3 CD
The CD 30 MP3 is capable of
playing MP3 CDs that have been
recorded to a CD-R.
•
•
•
•
Track title
Artist name
Track number and playing time
Album name
Supported File Structure
The CD 30 MP3 supports up to:
Z : Press to eject a CD, Eject CD
appears on the display and the
radio begins playing.
To change the display:
•
•
•
99 albums.
1. Press CD/MP3 twice, CD info
appears on the display.
367 tracks.
Selecting an Album
Bit rates up to 256 kbps.
2. Press \ or ] to select the
To select a different album when
the MP3 CD contains several
albums:
File Naming
display type.
Files must be named .mp3 for the
CD to work. ID3 tags are supported.
The following information shows
on the display when the CD MP3 is
playing.
3. After about five seconds, the
selected display type is saved.
1. Press CD/MP3.
2. Press \ or ] until the desired
album displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-10
Infotainment
Random Mode
Care of the CD Player
Care of CD’s and the CD
Player
Care of CDs
MP3 CD can be played in the
following random modes:
Do not add labels to a CD, it could
get caught in the CD player. Use a
marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
•
Random album: Tracks from
the selected album are played
randomly.
Store CDs in their original cases or
other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom of the disc.
If the bottom of a CD is damaged it
may not play properly or at all. Do
not touch the bottom of a CD while
handling it. Pick up CDs by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they
could damage the CD player.
•
•
Random CD: All tracks from all
albums are played randomly.
Notice: If a label is added to
a CD, or more than one CD is
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and
the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
Random Off: Turns off
random play.
To use random:
1. Press CD/MP3 three times.
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
2. Press \ or ] to select between
Random album, Random CD
and Random Off.
RDM shows on the display when
random is use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-11
Ignition Logic
When this feature is enabled it turns
the audio system on or off when
the ignition is turned on or off.
To turn the audio system on or off
with the Ignition Logic:
•
Press R or Z to turn the audio
system on. Press R to turn
the audio system off when the
Ignition Logic system is disabled
and the ignition is ON/RUN.
For vehicles with OnStar®, the
audio system will only turn off
if the ignition is OFF and OnStar
is not in use when the Ignition
Logic system is enabled.
CDC 40
•
[ (Multifunction Knob): Turn
to select a menu item, press
to enable or disable a menu item.
System Operation
R (Volume/Power): Press to
turn the system on or off. Turn to
increase or decrease the volume.
\ / ] / _ / ^ (Four-way Switch):
Press to select menu options.
BC (Board Computer): Press
to use the Board Computer, see
page 4-37.
SOUND: Press to enter the sound
settings menu and go to the
next page in sound settings.
SETTINGS: Press to adjust system
and sound settings.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-12
Infotainment
The Ignition Logic is preset to turn
off the audio system when the
ignition is turned off. To enable
or disable Ignition Logic:
•
CD displays along with the CD
number, CD track number, CD
title, artists name or album
name plus track time and track
name, if the CD player is active.
Menu System
The audio systems menu contains
types of menu pages:
Selection pages
1. Press SETTINGS, System
Settings displays.
•
•
•
CD in displays if more than one
CD is inserted.
Selection pages have a selection
menu on the left side of the screen
showing a preview of the menu
items. Selection pages lead
2. Turn the multifunction knob to
select Ign. Logic and press
the multifunction knob to select
or un-select the option.
MP3 displays if the CD is an
MP3 CD.
to navigation or settings pages.
RDM displays if the CD is being
played back in random mode.
Feature pages
System Display
Feature pages are menu pages.
Feature pages also contain
menu items which can be selected
and lead to other navigation or
settings pages. The Tuner menu
is an example of a feature page.
• T displays if Random CD is on.
The following information shows on
the system display:
• U displays if Random
•
FM or AM displays, and the
current station frequency or
station name if the radio is active.
Magazine is on.
• S displays if repeat track is on.
• u displays if Scan CD is on.
•
•
•
The station name displays
when RDS stations are active.
Settings pages
The most recent selected audio
source plays when the audio system
is turned on and the display is lit.
The outside temperature, time,
and date display when the audio
system is turned off and the ignition
is ON/RUN, see Driver Information
Setting pages are menu pages
where the audio system settings can
be changed.
The station name displays if RDS
is activated.
AS displays if AS is activated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-13
Menus
To exit from a menu:
Selecting from a List
•
Turn the multifunction knob to
the left until Return is displayed
and then press the knob.
The menus of the audio systems
are structured in levels. The current
menu level is indicated by vertical
lines at the edge of the screen.
Some menus are displayed in the
form of lists.
•
If the cursor is moved to the
top or bottom area of the display,
other list items appear. A
•
Press CDC, FM/AM, SETTINGS,
SOUND, or MAIN at any time to
exit from a menu and use that
function.
Selecting from a Menu
scroll-bar on the right edge of the
display indicates the current
cursor position in the list.
The items within a menu are
selected by turning the multifunction
knob to move the cursor. The cursor
highlights the menu item being
selected.
Selecting the Audio Menu
•
•
The last list item selected is
marked with an arrow in some
lists.
The Audio menu allows access to
FM, AM, CD, and Sound menus.
To access the Audio menu from
one of these menus:
To select a menu item:
The name of the list and the
number of items in it are displayed
above the list.
1. Turn the multifunction knob
until the desired menu item
is highlighted.
Turn the multifunction knob to the
left until Return displays and
then press the knob.
To select from a list:
2. Press the multifunction knob to
select the function or to display
another menu.
1. Turn the multifunction knob until
the desired item is highlighted.
2. Press the multifunction knob to
select the item.
•
Selected menu items display
as V or a.
•
Un-selected menu items display
as ( or o.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-14
Infotainment
Overlay Menus
3. Select Bass from the menu and
turn the multifunction knob to
adjust the level.
Adjusting the Equalizer
Additional notes and information on
the audio system or other vehicle
components may appear on
the display as an overlay in some
cases. The current menu is overlaid
with the information box. Some
settings have to be confirmed,
others are automatically enabled
after a short time.
The equalizer allows changes to be
made to seven frequencies.
4. Press the multifunction knob to
save the setting.
To adjust the equalizer:
1. Press SOUND and select the
Sound menu item.
Bass tones are automatically
adjusted to the driving speed to
compensate for rolling and ambient
noise. The setting cannot be
changed.
2. Select Equalizer.
3. Select the desired frequency and
turn the multifunction knob to
adjust the level.
Audio Settings
To adjust the Treble:
4. Press the multifunction knob to
save the setting.
The audio settings can be set
for each audio source and are
stored separately for each radio
station and the CD player.
1. Press SOUND and select the
Sound menu item.
5. Repeat these steps for each
frequency.
2. Select Treble - Bass.
3. Select Treble from the menu and
turn the multifunction knob to
adjust the level.
Adjusting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
After making changes to the
equalizer, the user option in the
Sound menu is enabled.
To adjust the Bass:
4. Press the multifunction knob to
save the setting.
1. Press SOUND and select the
Sound menu item.
2. Select Treble - Bass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-15
Adjusting the Sound Settings
3. Select Balance from the menu
and turn the multifunction knob
to adjust the level.
Adjusting the Sound Position
There are preset sound settings
designed for different types of
music.
The sound position for the audio
system can be adjusted. The
settings are:
4. Press the multifunction knob to
save the setting.
To adjust the sound settings:
Driver: Adjusts the sound position
for the drivers seat.
To adjust the Fade:
1. Press SOUND and select the
Sound menu item.
1. Press SOUND and select the
Sound menu item.
Front: Adjusts the sound position
for the front seats.
2. Select Sound.
2. Select Fader - Balance.
3. Select: User, Jazz, Speech, Pop,
Classical, and Rock.
All Positions: The sound is
adjusted for all seats.
3. Select Fader from the menu and
turn the multifunction knob to
adjust the level.
4. Press the multifunction knob to
save the setting.
To adjust the sound position:
1. Press SOUND and select the
Sound menu item.
4. Press the multifunction knob to
save the setting.
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade)
2. Select Position and then select
the desired sound position.
To adjust the Balance:
1. Press SOUND and select the
Sound menu item.
3. Press the multifunction knob to
save the setting.
2. Select Fader - Balance.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-16
Infotainment
Speed-Dependant Volume
Control (SDVC)
OnStar® Volume
Start-up Volume
For vehicles with OnStar, the OnStar
Volume is used to set the maximum
initial volume level for the OnStar
system when it is turned on.
The Start-up Volume is used to set
the maximum initial volume level
for the audio system when it
is turned on.
SDVC automatically adjusts the
volume for road and wind noise as
the vehicle increases or decreases
speed while driving.
To set OnStar Volume:
The maximum initial volume level is
used when the volume level before
turning the audio system off was
higher than the maximum initial
volume level set, or if the volume is
blow the maximum level.
To adjust SDVC:
1. Press SOUND, then SETTINGS
and select Volume from
the menu.
1. Press SOUND, then SETTINGS
and select Volume from
the menu.
2. Select OnStar IN.
2. Select SDVC.
3. Turn the multifunction knob to
adjust the level.
To set the On Volume level:
3. Turn the multifunction knob to
adjust the level.
1. Press SOUND, then SETTINGS
and select Volume from
the menu.
4. Press the multifunction knob to
save the setting.
4. Press the multifunction knob to
save the setting.
2. Select Start-up Volume.
3. Turn the multifunction knob to
adjust the level.
4. Press the multifunction knob to
save the setting.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-17
Finding an FM/AM Station
Manual Station Search: Use
manual station search when
the radio frequency is known.
Using the Radio
1 - 9 (Station Preset Buttons):
Press to play stations that are
programmed to the radio preset
pushbuttons.
FM/AM: Press to select between
FM, FM-AS, AM, and AM-AS,
or to listen to the radio while a CD
is playing. The Tuner Menu
displays.
To use manual station search with
the four-way switch:
•
Press and hold _ or ^ until the
desired frequency is reached.
Automatic Station Search: Use
automatic station search when
the radio frequency is unknown.
LOC (LOCAL/DX Function): Press
to change between LOC ON or
LOC OFF. When the LOC function
is on, it searches for the strongest
radio frequency. If none is found,
it automatically searches for a
weaker radio frequency. If no
frequency is found after the second
search, the radio returns to the
last active frequency. If a new
station search is not started within
one minute, the low sensitivity
(LOCAL) is set when the next
search is started. When LOC OFF
is set, a search is carried out
using the high sensitivity (DX).
•
Press _ or ^ repeatedly until the
desired frequency is reached.
The radio is volume is muted
while the radio searches for a
station with strong reception. If the
radio is unable to find a station, it
automatically switches to a more
sensitive search level. The radio
returns to the last station playing
if it fails to locate a station.
To use manual station search with
the multifunction knob:
1. Select Manual from the
Tuner menu.
2. Turn the multifunction knob until
the desired frequency is reached
and press the knob.
To use automatic station search, do
one of the following:
•
Press and hold \ or ] until
seek displays.
•
Select t or u from the radio
menu with the multifunction knob.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-18
Infotainment
Setting Preset Stations
To manually store stations using the
multifunction knob:
Using the CD Player
The radio can store up to
36 stations using the station
preset buttons:
The CDC 40 is capable of playing
CDs, MP3 CD-Rs, and mixed mode
CD-Rs that have both audio and
MP3 tracks on it.
1. Select the desired radio station
and select Store from the Tuner
Menu, a list of all stored
•
•
•
•
9 FM
stations is displayed.
The CD changer holds a maximum
of 6 CDs, and can play smaller
3 inch (8 cm) single CDs with an
adapter ring.
9 FM - AS (Autostore)
9 AM
2. Turn the multifunction knob to
choose the location for the
station to be stored and press
the multifunction knob.
9 AM - AS (Autostore)
Radio stations can be stored using
the station preset buttons, the
multifunction knob, and by using
Autostore.
Loading a CD
To store stations using Autostore:
To load CDs:
1. Select FM or AM and then select
Autostore from the Tuner Menu.
1. Press Z (Eject), the
CD-Changer menu displays.
To manually store stations using the
station preset buttons:
2. The Autostore menu is displayed,
and the automatic station storing
is started.
2. Select an empty CD
compartment using the
multifunction knob, Please
insert CD now displays.
1. Select FM or AM and tune to the
desired radio station.
3. The nine strongest stations in the
selected band are stored to the
preset buttons.
2. Press and hold one of the
9 station preset buttons, the
radio briefly mutes and displays
the previously stored station.
The new station is stored and
the radio begins playing.
3. Insert a CD into the slot, Reading
CD displays and a appears next
to the selected position.
4. Repeat Step 2 to load
additional CDs.
3. Repeat the steps for each radio
station to be stored.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-19
Display Options
Selecting a Track
Searching Within a Track
The display can be changed
depending on what type of CD
is in the CD player. The display
options are:
Tracks can be selected using the
four-way switch or the CD menu
functions.
To search within a track using the
four-way switch or the CD menu
functions:
Selecting a track using the four-way
switch:
To search using the four-way
switch:
•
Disabled ( o ): Track number,
CD number, album number
1. Press and hold \ or ].
\ or ]: Press to go to the next or
previous track within a CD.
and playing time for an audio CD.
2. Release \ or ] when the
desired point in the track is
reached.
•
Enabled ( a ): CD name,
track name, artist name,
and album name for an audio CD
with CD text.
Selecting a track using the CD
menu and the t or u function:
To search using the CD menu
1. Turn the multifunction knob until
Track is highlighted.
To change the display:
1. Select r or [.
2. Press the multifunction knob until
the desired track is displayed.
1. Select Extras from the CD Menu.
2. Select r or [ again when the
desired point in the track is
reached.
2. Enable or disable the Display
track box.
Selecting a track using the CD menu
and the Track function:
Playing a CD
1. Select Track from the CD menu.
CDC: Press to play a CD that
is already loaded into the CD player
while the radio is playing. The
CD Menu displays.
2. Select the desired track from
the menu.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-20
Infotainment
Selecting CD
To turn off random:
Repeat Track
CDs can be selected by:
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
The Repeat function repeats the
current track. The function can
be enabled and disabled by using
the four-way switch or the CD menu.
•
•
•
Pressing the appropriate station
preset button.
2. Select Normal, and T
disappears.
Pressing _ or ^ on the four-way
switch.
4 tracks per CD are played before
changing to the next CD for Random
magazine:
To use repeat using the four-way
switch:
Using the CD menu function.
1. Press and hold _ until S appears
To use random for all CDs:
To use the CD menu function:
1. Select CD from the CD menu.
2. Select the desired CD.
on the display.
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
2. Press and hold ^ until S is no
longer on the display to turn
off repeat track.
2. Select Random Magazine, and
U displays.
Random Mode
To turn off random:
To use repeat using the CD menu:
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
There are two modes for random:
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
•
•
Random play CD.
Random magazine.
2. Select Normal, and U
2. Select Repeat Track, S appears
disappears.
on the display.
Tracks on the current CD are
played in random order for Random
play CD:
To turn off repeat using the
CD menu:
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
To use Random play CD:
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
2. Select Normal, S disappears
from the display.
2. Select Random CD, and T
displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-21
Scan CD
To turn off Scan CD using the
CD menu:
Using an MP3 or Mixed
Mode CD
Supported File Structure
The Scan CD function scans the
first ten seconds of each track
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
on the current CD. The function can
be enabled and disabled by using
the four-way switch or the CD menu.
The CDC 40 supports up to:
2. Select Scan CD, u disappears
from the display.
•
•
•
253 albums.
65,535 tracks.
Ejecting a CD
To use Scan CD using the
four-way switch:
Bit rates up to 256 kbps.
To eject a CD:
1. Press and hold _ until u
1. Press Z.
File Naming
appears on the display.
Files must be named .mp3 for the
CD to work. ID3 tags are supported.
The following information shows
on the display when a CD MP3, or
a mixed mode CD is playing.
2. Select the desired CD to eject by
using the station preset buttons
or the multifunction knob.
2. Press and hold ^ until u is no
longer on the display to turn off
repeat track.
To eject all CDs:
To use Scan CD using the
CD menu:
1. Press and hold Z until Eject all
•
•
•
CD number
CDs displays.
Album name
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
2. Press the multifunction knob to
confirm. The CDs are ejected.
Track title and artist
2. Select Scan CD, u appears
on the display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-22
Infotainment
Playing an MP3 or Mixed
Mode CD
Selecting a track using the CD
menu and the Track function:
Selecting an MP3 or Mixed Mode
Album
1. Select Track from the CD menu.
CDs can be selected by:
CDC: Press to play an MP3 CD
that is already loaded into the
CD player while the radio is playing.
The CD Menu displays.
•
•
•
Pressing the appropriate station
preset button.
2. Select the desired track from
the menu.
Pressing _ or ^ on the four-way
switch.
Searching Within a Track
Selecting a Track
To search within a track using the
four-way switch or the CD menu
functions:
Tracks can be selected using the
four-way switch or the CD menu
functions.
Using the CD menu function.
To use the CD menu function:
1. Select Album from the CD menu.
2. Select the desired Album.
To search using the four-way
switch:
Selecting a track using the four-way
switch:
1. Press and hold \ or ].
Random Mode
\ or ]: Press to go to the next or
previous track within an album.
2. Release \ or ] when the
desired point in the track is
reached.
MP3 CDs and Mixed Mode CDs can
be played in random order. There
are two modes for random:
Selecting a track using the CD menu
and the t or u function:
To search using the CD menu
•
•
Random play CD.
Random magazine.
1. Turn the multifunction knob until
is highlighted.
1. Select r or [.
To turn off random:
2. Press the multifunction knob until
the desired track is displayed.
2. Select r or [ again when the
desired point in the track is
reached.
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
2. Select Normal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-23
Tracks play in the following order for
Random play CD:
Tracks play in the following order for
Random magazine:
Care of CD’s and the CD
Player
•
MP3 CD: If there are five or
fewer albums on an MP3
CD, four tracks per album are
played in random order. If there
are more than five albums on
the MP3 CD, one track is played
per album. Tracks from the
selected album are played
randomly.
•
MP3 CD: If there are five or
fewer albums on an MP3
CD, four tracks per album are
played before changing to
the next CD. If there are more
than five albums, one track
per album is played before
changing to the next CD.
Care of CDs
Store CDs in their original cases or
other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight and dust. The CD
player scans the bottom of the disc.
If the bottom of a CD is damaged it
may not play properly or at all. Do not
touch the bottom of a CD while
handling it. Pick up CDs by grasping
the outer edges or the edge of the
hole and the outer edge.
•
Mixed Mode CD: On a Mixed
Mode CD, the first of all four
tracks from the audio part
are played in random order and
then the system changes to
the next CD. The next time the
system changes to the Mixed
Mode CD, the tracks from
the MP3 part are played as
described above.
•
Mixed Mode CD: On a Mixed
Mode CD, the tracks from the
audio part are played first
in random order. Then the tracks
from the MP3 part are played
as described above.
If the surface of a CD is dirty, take
a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water,
and clean it. Make sure the wiping
process starts from the center to
the edge.
To use Random play CD:
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
2. Select Random CD, T
To use random for all CDs:
displays.
1. Select Extras from the CD menu.
2. Select Random Magazine,
U displays.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-24
Infotainment
Care of the CD Player
Depending on the vehicle’s features,
see the following audio controls:
Audio Steering Wheel
Controls
Do not add labels to a CD, it could
get caught in the CD player. Use a
marking pen to write on the top of the
CD if a description is needed.
Z (Rotary Control): Manually
seek a station by turning to move
the cursor either to the previous
or next screen entry. Press to
confirm the selection.
Do not use CD lens cleaners, they
could damage the CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, or more than one CD is
For the DIC (Driver Information
Center), press the rotary control to
call up the DIC menu. Press to
reset the current value. Press and
hold for two seconds to reset
all of the values.
inserted into the slot at a time,
or an attempt is made to play
scratched or damaged CDs, the
CD player could be damaged.
While using the CD player, use
only CDs in good condition
without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and
the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
Y : Press to go to the next preset
station if playing the radio.
Some audio controls can be
adjusted at the steering wheel.
Press to go to the beginning of a
currently playing CD or to the
next album on an MP3.
Several functions of the audio
system can be operated with the
audio remote control buttons and
the rotary control located on
Theft-Deterrent Feature
both sides of the steering wheel.
The audio system is equipped
with an electronic safety system to
prevent theft, and only works in the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infotainment
6-25
FM Stereo
X : Press to toggle between the
radio and CD or MP3 as an
active source for playback.
Radio Reception
FM stereo gives the best sound,
but FM signals only reach about
10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere
with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
^ / _: Press the arrows to go back
or advance to the previous or
next preset station if playing the
radio. Press and hold to scroll
through the preset stations.
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the item Fixed Mast Antenna
from the accessory power outlet.
Press to go back or advance one
track at a time on a CD.
The fixed mast antenna can
withstand most car washes without
AM
being damaged, or it can be
Press to quickly reverse or advance
through the tracks within a CD.
The range for most AM stations is
removed. If the mast should ever
greater than for FM, especially at
become slightly bent, straighten
night. The longer range can cause
it out by hand. If the mast is badly
3 (volume): Turn the rotary
control to adjust the volume. Press
and hold to adjust the volume
continuously.
station frequencies to interfere with
bent, replace it.
each other. For better radio
Check occasionally to make sure
the mast is still tightened to the
antenna base located on the roof of
the vehicle.
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on your radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-26
Infotainment
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
7-1
Climate Controls
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can be controlled with
this system.
Climate Controls
Operation
Air Delivery Mode Knob
The air delivery mode or fan speed
can be manually adjusted.
To change the current air delivery
mode, use the left knob to select
one of the following:
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs
air to the instrument panel outlets
and to the floor outlets. Cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and
warmer air to the floor outlets.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-2
Climate Controls
Temperature Control Knob
Air Conditioning
Y (Vent): This mode directs air to
the instrument panel outlets.
Turn the center knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the temperature inside the
vehicle.
For vehicles with air conditioning.
X (Defog): This mode directs air
to the windshield and front door
windows. To reduce fogging, press
# (Air Conditioning): Press
to turn the air conditioning system
on or off. An indicator light inside
the button comes on when the air
conditioning is activated. The air
conditioning can only be operated
if the engine is on and the fan is
running.
Fan Speed Control Knob
# to turn on the air conditioner.
The fan must also be on.
Turn the right knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the fan speed. The
speed settings can be adjusted
between 1 (Low) and 4 (High).
W (Defog/Floor): This mode
directs air to the windshield, front
door windows, and floor outlets.
To reduce fogging, press # to turn
on the air conditioner. The fan
must also be on.
When the air conditioning is on
the air is cooled and dehumidified.
If cooling or dehumidification is not
desired, turn off the air conditioning
to save fuel.
When the fan is off, the air
conditioning compressor is also off.
There will be some airflow from
the outlets when driving, even with
the fan in the off position.
[ (Floor): This mode directs
most of the air to the floor outlets.
On hot days, open the windows
briefly to let the hot inside air
escape, then close them. This helps
to reduce the time it takes for the
vehicle to cool down.
A (Fan): Select this position to
turn the fan off.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Climate Controls
7-3
For quicker cool down, do the
following:
The quality of the passenger
compartment air may decrease
since the amount of outside
air entering the vehicle is reduced.
= (Rear Window Defogger):
Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator
light inside the button will be lit
when in use.
1. Press # to turn on the air
conditioning.
When the recirculation mode is
used without air conditioning, the
air humidity increases, and the
windows may fog. Avoid using the
recirculation mode during high
periods of humidity or cool outside
temperatures since this may result in
increased window fogging. If window
fogging is experienced, select the
defrost mode.
2. Select Y mode.
If your vehicle has heated mirrors,
they turn on when the rear window
defogger button is pressed. Press
the button again to turn them off.
For more information, see Outside
3. Set the temperature knob to the
coldest temperature.
4. Set the fan knob to 4.
5. Open all vents.
The rear window defogger will stay
on for approximately 15 minutes
after the button is pressed, unless
the ignition is turned off.
Recirculation
^ (Recirculation): Press to
turn the recirculation mode on or off.
An indicator light inside the button
comes on when the recirculation
mode is active. This mode
recirculates air inside the passenger
compartment and prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a
warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
Notice: Do not use anything
sharp on the inside of the rear
window. If you do, you could cut
or damage the warming grid, and
the repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle
The rear window defogger will only
work when the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7-4
Climate Controls
Operation Tips
Outlet Adjustment
•
Clear away any ice, snow, or
leaves from the air inlets at
the base of the windshield that
can block the flow of air into
the vehicle.
Use the thumbwheel below the air
outlets to change the direction of the
air flow. Use the vertical thumbwheel
next to the outlets to control the
amount of air flow or to shut off the
airflow completely.
•
•
Use of non-GM approved hood
deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Keep all outlets open whenever
possible for best system
performance.
Keep the path under all seats
clear of objects to help circulate
the air inside the vehicle
more effectively.
•
If fogging reoccurs while in vent
or bi-level modes with mild
temperature throughout the
vehicle, turn on the air conditioner
to reduce windshield fogging.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-2
Driving and Operating
Following break-in, engine
speed and load can be gradually
increased.
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position
and the regular brake pedal must
be applied.
Starting and
Operating Your
Vehicle
Ignition Positions
A (LOCK/OFF): This is the only
position from which you can remove
the key. This locks the steering
wheel, ignition and automatic
transmission.
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not
need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long
run if you follow these guidelines:
On vehicles with an automatic
transmission, the shift lever must
be in P (Park) to turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
•
Do not drive at any one
constant speed, fast or slow,
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle
The ignition switch can bind in the
LOCK/OFF position with your wheels
turned off center. If this happens,
move the steering wheel from
right to left while turning the key to
STEERING UNLOCK/IGNITION
OFF. If this doesn’t work, then the
vehicle needs service.
starts. Avoid downshifting
to brake or slow the vehicle.
•
Avoid making hard stops for
the first 200 miles (322 km) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet broken
in. Hard stops with new linings
can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Use the key to turn the ignition
switch to four different positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct key,
make sure it is all the way in, and
turn it only with your hand. If the
key cannot be turned by hand, see
your dealer/retailer.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Manual Transmission
8-3
B (STEERING UNLOCKED/
IGNITION OFF): This position
unlocks the steering wheel.
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
The power windows and mirrors
may be used for up to five minutes
after the key is turned to LOCK/OFF.
The shift lever should be in Neutral
and the parking brake engaged.
Hold the clutch pedal to the
floor and start the engine. The
vehicle will not start if the clutch
pedal is not all the way down.
C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch
stays in this position when the
engine is running. This position can
be used to operate the electrical
accessories, as well as to display
some warning and indicator lights.
The power windows and mirrors will
not operate after any of the front
doors are opened.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to
START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed
will go down as your engine gets
warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and
The radio may be used for up to
sixty minutes after the key is turned
to LOCK/OFF.
The battery could be drained if you
leave the key in the ON/RUN position
with the engine off. You may not be
able to start the vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended
period of time.
Starting the Engine
Automatic Transmission
D (START): This position starts
the engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON/RUN for normal
driving. A warning tone will sound
when the driver door is opened and
the key is in the ignition.
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart
when you are already moving,
use N (Neutral) only.
transmission gently to allow the
oil to warm up and lubricate all
moving parts.
Notice: Do not try to shift to
P (Park) if your vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when your vehicle is stopped.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-4
Driving and Operating
Your vehicle has a
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
Notice: The engine is designed
to work with the electronics in the
vehicle. If you add electrical parts
or accessories, you could change
the way the engine operates.
Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer/retailer. If you do not,
the engine might not perform
properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
2. If the engine does not start after
5-10 seconds, especially in very
cold weather (below 0°F or
−18°C), it could be flooded with
too much gasoline. Try pushing
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there as
you hold the key in START for up
to a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds between
each try, to let the cranking motor
cool down. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and
accelerator. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do
the same thing. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine.
Do not race the engine
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking for a
few seconds or until the vehicle
starts. If the engine does not start
and the key is held in START for
many seconds, cranking will be
stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this
system also prevents cranking if
the engine is already running.
Engine cranking can be stopped
by turning the ignition switch to
STEERING UNLOCKED/
Engine Heater
The engine heater can provide
easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up
in cold weather conditions at or
below − 4°F (− 20°C). Vehicles with
an engine heater should be plugged
in at least four hours before starting.
IGNITION OFF or LOCK/OFF.
immediately after starting it.
Operate the engine and
transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all
moving parts.
Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-5
To Use the Engine Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
Automatic Transmission
Operation
{ CAUTION
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause
an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord
could overheat and cause a
fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a
properly grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
will not reach, use a heavy-duty
three-prong extension cord
rated for at least 15 amps.
2. The engine heater connector is
located in the passenger side
lower front grille. Open the cover
and insert the 110-volt AC
adapter delivered in the vehicles
glove box.
If your vehicle has an automatic
transmission, the shift lever is
located on the console between
the seats.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug both ends of
the adapter and store the adapter
to prevent damage.
Your vehicle may also have an
electronic shift position indicator that
displays the position of the shift
lever. This indicator is located above
the trip odometer on the instrument
panel cluster.
The length of time the heater should
remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer
in the area where you will be parking
the vehicle for the best advice
on this.
3. Plug the other end of the adapter
into a grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-6
Driving and Operating
PARK (P): This position locks the
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when the engine is started
because your vehicle cannot
move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in
PARK (P) before starting the engine.
Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control
system. The regular brakes must be
applied before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the ignition key is in
ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out of
PARK (P) while holding the brake
pedal down, see Shifting Out of
NEUTRAL (N): In this position,
the engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart while you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N)
only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N)
when your vehicle is being towed.
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
It is dangerous to get out of
your vehicle if the shift lever is
not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll.
Shifting into a drive gear while
the engine is running at high
speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal, the vehicle could move
very rapidly. You could lose
control and hit people or
objects. Do not shift into a
drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to
back up.
Do not leave your vehicle when
the engine is running unless
you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure
your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level
ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park
on page 8-11.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
only after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and
forth to get out of snow, ice, or sand
without damaging the transmission,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-7
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
THIRD (3): This position is also
used for normal driving, however, it
offers more power and lower fuel
economy than DRIVE (D). Here are
some times you might choose
FIRST (1): This position gives you
even more power but lower fuel
economy than SECOND (2). Use it
on very steep hills, or in deep snow
or mud. If the shift lever is put in
FIRST (1), the transmission does not
shift into first gear until the vehicle is
going slowly enough.
THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D):
•
When driving on hilly, winding
roads.
DRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving.
Notice: Spinning the tires
or holding the vehicle in one
place on a hill using only
the accelerator pedal may
damage the transmission. The
repair will not be covered by your
warranty. If you are stuck, do
not spin the tires. When stopping
on a hill, use the brakes to
hold the vehicle in place.
•
When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives
you more power but lower fuel
economy. Use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control the vehicles speed
as you go down steep mountain
roads, but then you would also want
to use your brakes off and on.
Notice: If your vehicle seems to
start up rather slowly or not shift
gears when you go faster, and you
continue to drive your vehicle that
way, you could damage the
transmission. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
Notice: Driving in FIRST (1) for
more than 25 miles (40 km) or at
speeds over 55 mph (90 km/h)
may damage the transmission.
Also, shifting into FIRST (1) at
speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h)
can cause damage. Drive in
THIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead
of FIRST (1).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-8
Driving and Operating
The Winter Driving Mode is turned
off by one of the following:
Winter Driving Mode
Automatic Neutral Idle
This feature helps you accelerate in
slippery driving conditions by using
THIRD (3) gear when you begin to
accelerate from a stopped position.
The Automatic Neutral Idle shift
function automatically sets the
transmission to NEUTRAL (N) to
reduce fuel consumption when
the vehicle is not moving.
•
•
•
Pressing the winter driving mode
button again.
Manually shifting to SECOND (2)
or FIRST (1) gear.
Automatic neutral is activated when
ALL of the following occurs:
Turning off the ignition.
•
The selector lever is in
DRIVE (D), THIRD (3),
SECOND (2) or FIRST (1) gear.
•
•
•
The foot brake is pressed.
The vehicle is stopped.
This light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on when the winter
driving mode is active.
The accelerator pedal is not
pressed.
•
•
The transmission fluid
temperature is greater than
0° C (32° F).
To protect the transmission,
the winter program turns off
automatically at high transmission
oil temperatures.
The winter driving mode button is
located on the center console.
The road is not steeper than 15°.
Press once to turn on the winter
driving mode feature. The vehicle
will be in THIRD (3) gear when the
vehicle begins to move. Once the
vehicle is moving, the vehicle will
upshift normally.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-9
When you release the brake with the
transmission in gear, you may feel
the transmission shift from Neutral to
Drive automatically. You may also
feel the transmission shift from Drive
to Neutral when the brake is applied.
This is normal operation of the
SECOND (2): Press the clutch
pedal as you let up on the
accelerator pedal and shift into
SECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on
the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
Manual Transmission
Operation
Five-Speed
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and
automatic transmission.
FIFTH (5): Shift into THIRD (3),
FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5), the
same way you do for SECOND (2).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
Downhill Grade Assist
This is the shift pattern.
When traveling down steep grades
your transmission may automatically
downshift into a lower gear when the
brake is applied. You may feel this
downshift. This performance feature
of your automatic transmission
assists with engine braking to reduce
wear on your brake system. This is
normal operation of the automatic
transmission.
Here is how to operate your manual
transmission:
To stop, let up on the accelerator
pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,
and shift to NEUTRAL (N).
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal
and shift into FIRST (1). Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when
you are going less than 20 mph
(32 km/h). If you have come to a
complete stop and it is hard to shift
into FIRST (1), put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the
clutch. Press the clutch pedal back
down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position
when you start or idle your engine.
Performance On Demand
REVERSE (R): With the vehicle
stationary, wait three seconds after
declutching and pull up on the
button on the selector lever
to engage reverse gear.
This feature allows the driver to
automatically force a downshift,
when traveling at speeds less than
approximately 70 mph (112 km/h),
by fully pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-10
Driving and Operating
If reverse gear does not engage, set
the selector lever in neutral, and
release the clutch pedal. Press the
clutch pedal again and repeat
the gear selection.
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse)
only after the vehicle is stopped.
Parking Brake
Also, use REVERSE (R), along
with the parking brake, to park your
vehicle.
Shift Speeds
{ CAUTION
If you skip a gear when you
downshift, you could lose
control of your vehicle. You
could injure yourself or others.
Do not shift down more than
one gear at a time when you
downshift.
The parking brake is located
between the driver and passenger
seats.
To set the parking brake, hold the
brake pedal down and pull up on the
parking brake lever.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
To release the parking brake, hold
the brake pedal down. Pull the
parking brake lever up until you
can press the release button. Hold
the release button in as you move
the brake lever all the way down.
transmission. The repairs would
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-11
A warning chime will sound and
a brake warning light located on the
instrument panel cluster will come
on, if the parking brake is set,
the ignition is on and the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
1. Hold the brake pedal down
with your right foot and set
Shifting Into Park
the parking brake. See Parking
information.
{ CAUTION
It can be dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if the shift lever
is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or
others could be injured. To be
sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that
follow.
2. Move the shift lever into
PARK (P) by holding in the button
on the shift lever and pushing the
shift lever all the way toward the
front of the vehicle.
Notice: Driving with the parking
brake on can overheat the
brake system and cause
premature wear or damage
to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully
released and the brake warning
light is off before driving.
3. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it
with you. If you can leave
your vehicle with the ignition
key in your hand, your vehicle
is in PARK (P).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-12
Driving and Operating
If you have to leave your vehicle
with the engine running, be sure your
vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you
leave it. After you have moved the
shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see
if you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button.
This is called torque lock. To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into PARK (P) properly
before you leave the driver’s seat.
To find out how, see Shifting Into
Leaving Your Vehicle with the
Engine Running
{ CAUTION
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move
When you are ready to drive, move
the shift lever out of PARK (P) before
you release the parking brake.
suddenly if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. And, if you
leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and
even catch fire. You or others
could be injured. Do not leave
the vehicle with the engine
running.
If torque lock does occur, you may
need to have another vehicle
push your vehicle a little uphill to
take some of the pressure from the
parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of
PARK (P).
If you can, it means that the shift
lever was not fully locked in
PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you
do not shift your transmission into
PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on
the parking pawl in the transmission.
You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Parking the Vehicle
8-13
To shift out of PARK (P) use the
following sequence:
Shifting Out of Park
This vehicle has an electronic shift
lock release system. The shift
lock release is designed to:
Before you get out of your vehicle,
move the shift lever into FIRST (1) or
REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the
parking brake. Once the shift lever
has been placed into FIRST (1) or
REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal
pressed in, you can turn the ignition
off and release the clutch.
1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Press the shift lever button.
•
Prevent ignition key removal
unless the shift lever is in
PARK (P) with the shift lever
button fully released.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of
PARK (P):
•
Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of PARK (P), unless
the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the regular brake
pedal is applied.
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
Parking Over Things
That Burn
2. While holding down the brake
pedal, press the shift lever
button again.
{ CAUTION
The shift lock release is always
functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less
than 9 volt) battery.
3. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
Things that can burn could
touch hot exhaust parts under
your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry
grass, or other things that
can burn.
If you still cannot move the shift
lever from PARK (P), consult your
dealer/retailer or a professional
towing service.
If your vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
page 9-68 for more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-14
Driving and Operating
Engine Exhaust
Running the Vehicle
While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
CAUTION (Continued)
{ CAUTION
• Your vehicle was damaged
when driving over high
points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done
correctly.
• Your vehicle or the exhaust
system has been modified
improperly.
Engine exhaust can kill. It
contains the gas carbon
monoxide (CO), which you
cannot see or smell. It can cause
unconsciousness and death.
{ CAUTION
Idling the engine with the
climate control system off
could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the
earlier caution under Engine
You might have exhaust coming
in if:
• The exhaust system sounds
strange or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty
underneath.
If you ever suspect exhaust is
coming into your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the
windows down to blow out
any CO.
(Continued)
• Your vehicle was damaged in
a collision.
• Have your vehicle fixed
immediately.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-15
CAUTION (Continued)
{ CAUTION
CAUTION (Continued)
It can be dangerous to get out
of your vehicle if the shift lever
is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your
vehicle can roll. Do not leave
your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to.
If you have left the engine
vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level
ground, always set the parking
brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
Also, idling in a closed-in place
can let deadly carbon monoxide
(CO) into your vehicle even if the
climate control fan is at the
highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come
in easily. NEVER park in a
Follow the proper steps to be sure
your vehicle will not move. See
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could
be injured. To be sure your
garage with the engine running.
Also see “If You Are Caught in a
Blizzard” under Winter Driving
on page 8-27.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-16
Driving and Operating
Death and injury associated with
drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Driving Your Vehicle
CAUTION (Continued)
Defensive Driving
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Defensive driving means “always
expect the unexpected.” The
first step in driving defensively is to
wear your safety belt, see Safety
Police records show that
almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these deaths
are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years,
more than 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol,
with about 250,000 people injured.
Drunk Driving
{ CAUTION
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and
other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes.
Anticipate what they might do
and be ready. In addition:
• Allow enough following
distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
{ CAUTION
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by
even a small amount of alcohol.
You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you
drive after drinking. Do not
drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you
are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
(Continued)
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-17
Medical research shows that alcohol
in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries
to the brain, spinal cord, or heart.
This means that when anyone who
has been drinking — driver or
passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than
if the person had not been drinking.
And, of course, actual stopping
distances vary greatly with the
Braking
page 4-17.
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition of
the road, whether it is wet, dry, or icy;
tire tread; the condition of the brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the
amount of brake force applied.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. First, you
have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then
you have to bring up your foot and
do it. That is reaction time.
Avoid needless heavy
braking. Some people drive in
spurts — heavy acceleration
Average reaction time is about
three-fourths of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be
less with one driver and as long
as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical
condition, alertness, coordination,
and eyesight all play a part.
Control of a Vehicle
followed by heavy braking — rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking.
If you keep pace with the traffic and
allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of
The following three systems help
to control your vehicle while
driving — brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of
your vehicle.
So do alcohol, drugs, and
frustration. But even in three-fourths
of a second, a vehicle moving at
60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet
(20 m). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-18
Driving and Operating
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops
while you are driving, brake normally
but do not pump the brakes. If you
do, the pedal could get harder to
push down. If the engine stops, you
will still have some power brake
assist. But you will use it when you
brake. Once the power assist is used
up, it can take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
Let us say the road is wet and you
are driving safely. Suddenly, an
animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and
continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock
Brake System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that
will help prevent a braking skid.
A computer senses that wheels
are slowing down. If one of
the wheels is about to stop rolling,
the computer will separately
work the brakes at each wheel.
When you start the engine and
begin to drive away, ABS will check
itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this
test is going on, and you might even
notice that the brake pedal moves a
little. This is normal.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories
ABS can change the brake
pressure faster than any driver could.
The computer is programmed to
make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you
steer around the obstacle while
braking hard.
As you brake, the computer keeps
receiving updates on wheel speed
and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
If there is BS,
this warning light will stay on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-19
StabiliTrak® System
Remember: ABS does not change
the time you need to get your foot
up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you
get too close to the vehicle in front of
you, you will not have time to apply
the brakes if that vehicle suddenly
slows or stops. Always leave enough
room up ahead to stop, even though
you have ABS.
Your vehicle may have StabiliTrak
which combines antilock brake,
traction and stability control systems
and helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle
in most driving conditions.
When you turn the ignition on,
this light on the instrument panel
cluster will come on for a few
seconds, then go out when the
system is ready.
When you first start your vehicle and
begin to drive away, the system
performs several diagnostic checks
to ensure there are no problems.
You may hear or feel the system
working. This is normal and does not
mean there is a problem with your
vehicle. The system should initialize
before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h).
Using ABS
You may also feel or hear the
system working; this is normal.
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and
let antilock work for you. You might
hear the antilock pump or motor
operate, and feel the brake
StabiliTrak is automatically enabled
whenever you start your vehicle.
To assist the driver with vehicle
directional control, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. But, you
can turn it off if you ever need to.
pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
The system monitors vehicle
movements, and helps the driver
maintain control of the vehicle in
most driving situations. When the
vehicle’s stability is affected the
engine output is reduced, and the
brakes are applied to individual
wheels.
Braking in Emergencies
With ABS, you can steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
you more than even the very best
braking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-20
Driving and Operating
It is recommended to leave the
system on for normal driving
Steering
If the engine stalls while you
are driving, the power steering assist
system should continue to operate
until you are able to stop the
vehicle. If you lose power steering
assist because the power steering
system is not functioning, you
conditions, but it may be necessary
to turn the system off if your vehicle
is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow,
and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it. It may also be
necessary to turn off the system
when driving in extreme off-road
conditions where high wheel spin
is required. See If Your Vehicle is
on page 8-29.
The g swithe
instrument panel below the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
can steer, but it will take more effort.
To turn off StabiliTrak, press and
hold the g switch until the light in the
switch illuminates.
If you turn the steering wheel in
either direction several times until it
stops, or hold the steering wheel in
the stopped position for an extended
amount of time, you may notice a
reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power
steering assist should return shortly
after a few normal steering
To turn StabiliTrak on again, press
the g switch again or restart the
vehicle.
StabiliTrak may also turn off
automatically if it determines that a
problem exists with the system.
The light on the instrument panel
cluster will be on solid to warn
the driver that StabiliTrak is disabled
and requires service. If the problem
does not clear after restarting
the vehicle, you should see your
dealer/retailer for service.
A light in the switch should come
on briefly when the ignition key
is turned to ON/RUN as a check
to let you know that the light
is working.
movements.
The power steering system does not
require regular maintenance. If you
suspect steering system problems
and/or the Service Vehicle Soon light
comes on, contact your dealer/
retailer for service repairs.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories
more information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-21
Suppose you are steering
If you need to reduce speed when
approaching a curve, do it before
you enter the curve, while the front
wheels are straight ahead.
Steering Tips
through a sharp curve. Then
you suddenly accelerate. Both
control systems — steering
and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet
the road. Adding the sudden
acceleration can demand too much
of those places. You can lose
on page 8-19.
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control”
accidents mentioned on the news
happen on curves. Here is why:
Try to adjust the speed so you can
drive through the curve. Maintain
a reasonable, steady speed. Wait
to accelerate until you are out of the
curve, and then accelerate gently
into the straightaway.
Experienced driver or beginner,
each of us is subject to the same
laws of physics when driving on
curves. The traction of the tires
against the road surface makes it
possible for the vehicle to change its
path when you turn the front wheels.
If there is no traction, inertia will
keep the vehicle going in the same
direction. If you have ever tried to
steer a vehicle on wet ice, you will
understand this.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories
What should you do if this ever
happens? Ease up on the brake
or accelerator pedal, steer the
vehicle the way you want it to go,
and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn
that you should adjust your speed.
Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road
conditions. Under less favorable
conditions you will want to go slower.
Traction in a curve depends on
the condition of the tires and
the road surface, the angle at which
the curve is banked, and your
speed. While in a curve, speed is
the one factor you can control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-22
Driving and Operating
Steering in Emergencies
Off-Road Recovery
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a
car suddenly pulls out from nowhere,
or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of
you. You can avoid these problems
by braking — if you can stop in time.
But sometimes you cannot; there is
not room. That is the time for evasive
action — steering around the
Your vehicle’s right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
An emergency like this requires
close attention and a quick decision.
If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock
positions, you can turn it a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well
in emergencies like these. First
page 8-17. It is better to remove
as much speed as you can from a
possible collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
If the level of the shoulder is only
slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy.
Ease off the accelerator and then,
if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles
the edge of the pavement.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear
safety belts properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
Skidding
8-23
Turn the steering wheel 3 to
5 inches (about one-eighth turn)
until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn the
steering wheel to go straight down
the roadway.
•
Do not get too close to the vehicle
you want to pass. Doing so can
reduce your visibility.
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable care
suited to existing conditions, and by
not overdriving those conditions.
But skids are always possible.
•
•
Wait your turn to pass a slow
vehicle.
When you are being passed, ease
to the right.
Passing
The three types of skids correspond
to your vehicle’s three control
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the steering
or cornering skid, too much speed or
steering in a curve causes tires to
slip and lose cornering force. And
in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels
to spin.
Passing another vehicle on a
two-lane road can be dangerous.
To reduce the risk of danger
while passing:
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when
the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do
not have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do what
the driver has asked.
•
Look down the road, to the sides,
and to crossroads for situations
that might affect a successful
pass. If in doubt, wait.
•
Watch for traffic signs, pavement
markings, and lines that could
indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
A cornering skid is best handled
by easing your foot off of the
accelerator pedal.
double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-24
Driving and Operating
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering
quickly enough, your vehicle may
straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
slippery until your vehicle is
skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water,
ice, or packed snow on the road to
make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any
doubt.
•
Slow down and keep more space
between you and other vehicles
because headlamps can only
light up so much road ahead.
•
•
•
•
Watch for animals.
When tired, pull off the road.
Do not wear sunglasses.
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
you want to slow down and
Remember: Any Antilock Brake
System (ABS) helps avoid only the
braking skid.
Avoid staring directly into
approaching headlamps.
•
•
Keep the windshield and all glass
on your vehicle clean — inside
and out.
adjust your driving to these
Driving at Night
conditions. It is important to slow
down on slippery surfaces because
stopping distance is longer and
vehicle control more limited.
Night driving is more dangerous
than day driving because some
drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Keep your eyes moving,
especially during turns or curves.
While driving on a surface with
reduced traction, try your best to
avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You
No one can see as well at night as
in the daytime. But, as we get
older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need
at least twice as much light to see
the same thing at night as a
20-year-old.
Night driving tips include:
•
•
•
Drive defensively.
Do not drink and drive.
Reduce headlamp glare by
adjusting the inside rearview
mirror.
might not realize the surface is
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-25
There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is
to slow down when the road is wet.
Driving in Rain and on
Wet Roads
CAUTION (Continued)
Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
Flowing or rushing water
Other Rainy Weather Tips
creates strong forces. Driving
through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be
carried away. If this happens,
you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
•
•
•
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape.
{ CAUTION
•
•
•
Keep the windshield washer fluid
reservoir filled.
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in
a quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
Hydroplaning
Have good tires with proper tread
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under your vehicle’s
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is
wet enough and you are going fast
enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
Turn off cruise control, if
equipped.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-26
Driving and Operating
Before Leaving on a
Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long
trip, consider having it serviced by
your dealer/retailer before departing.
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Always be alert and pay attention
to your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find
a safe place to park your vehicle
and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through
mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
•
Keep the vehicle serviced
and in good shape.
Things to check on your own
include:
Other driving tips include:
•
Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
•
•
•
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Keep interior temperature cool.
•
Windshield Washer Fluid:
Reservoir full? Windows
clean — inside and outside?
Keep your eyes moving — scan
the road ahead and to the sides.
•
Going down steep or long hills,
shift to a lower gear.
•
•
Wiper Blades: In good shape?
Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All
levels checked?
•
Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
{ CAUTION
•
•
Lamps: Do they all work and are
lenses clean?
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking
or even none going down a hill.
You could crash. Shift down to
let the engine assist the brakes
on a steep downhill slope.
Tires: Are treads good? Are tires
inflated to recommended
pressure?
•
Weather and Maps: Safe to
travel? Have up-to-date maps?
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-27
of old carpet, or a couple of burlap
bags to help provide traction. Be sure
you properly secure these items in
your vehicle.
•
Pay attention to special road
signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
{ CAUTION
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will
have to do all the work of
slowing down and they could
get so hot that they would not
work well. You would then have
poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could
crash. Always have the engine
running and the vehicle in gear
when going downhill.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter
driving:
Most of the time, those places
where the tires meet the road
probably have good traction.
•
Have your vehicle in good shape
for winter.
However, if there is snow or ice
between the tires and the road, you
can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip,
and need to be very careful.
•
You might want to put winter
emergency supplies in your
vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small
brush or broom, a supply of
•
Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
What is the worst time for this? Wet
ice. Very cold snow or ice can be
slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it
can offer the least traction of all.
windshield washer fluid, a rag, some
winter outer clothing, a small shovel,
a flashlight, a red cloth, and reflective
warning triangles. And, if you will be
driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece
•
Top of hills: Be alert — something
could be in your lane (stalled car,
accident).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-28
Driving and Operating
You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing
rain begins to fall. Try to avoid driving
on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
than you would on dry pavement.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy
snow, you could be in a serious
situation. You should probably
stay with your vehicle unless you
know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the
snow. Here are some things to do
to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
•
Allow greater following distance
on any slippery road.
Whatever the condition — smooth
ice, packed, blowing, or loose
snow — drive with caution.
•
Watch for slippery spots. The
road might be fine until you hit
a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice
patches can appear in shaded
areas where the sun cannot
reach, such as around clumps of
trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface
of a curve or an overpass can
remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch
of ice ahead of you, brake before
you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice,
and avoid sudden steering
Accelerate gently. Try not to
break the fragile traction. If you
accelerate too fast, the drive wheels
will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
•
Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
•
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to
alert police that you have been
stopped by the snow.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
improves your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop
on a slippery road. Even though you
have ABS, begin stopping sooner
•
Put on extra clothing or wrap a
blanket around you. If you do not
have blankets or extra clothing,
make body insulators from
newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats — anything you can
wrap around yourself or tuck
under your clothing to keep warm.
maneuvers.
You can run the engine to keep
warm, but be careful.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
If Your Vehicle is
8-29
Run your engine only as long as you
must. This saves fuel. When you run
the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the
accelerator slightly. This uses less
fuel for the heat that you get and it
keeps the battery charged. You will
need a well-charged battery to
restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with the
headlamps. Let the heater run
for a while.
{ CAUTION
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,
or Snow
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (carbon
Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
monoxide) gas to get inside.
CO could overcome you and
kill you. You cannot see it or
smell it, so you might not know
it is in your vehicle. Clear away
snow from around the base of
your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust
pipe. And check around again
from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
{ CAUTION
Then, shut the engine off and close
the window almost all the way to
preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when
you feel really uncomfortable from
the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long
as you can. To help keep warm,
you can get out of the vehicle and
do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half hour or so until help
comes.
If you let your vehicle’s tires
spin at high speed, they can
explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle
can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or
other damage. Spin the wheels
as little as possible and avoid
going above 35 mph (55 km/h)
as shown on the speedometer.
Open a window just a little on
the side of the vehicle that is
away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-30
Driving and Operating
Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when
the transmission is in gear. By slowly
spinning the wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will
cause a rocking motion that could
free your vehicle. If that does not get
your vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out. If your
vehicle does need to be towed out,
Rocking Your Vehicle to
Get It Out
First, turn the steering wheel left and
right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any stability
page 8-19. Then shift back and forth
between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear, or with a manual
transmission, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R),
spinning the wheels as little as
possible. To prevent transmission
wear, wait until the wheels stop
spinning before shifting gears.
Loading the Vehicle
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.
Two labels on your vehicle
show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
page 9-72.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-31
Tire and Loading Information
Label
and Loading Information label
shows the number of occupant
seating positions (A), and
the maximum vehicle capacity
weight (B) in kilograms and
pounds.
{ CAUTION
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
The Tire and Loading
maximum front or rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR). If you do, parts on
the vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your
vehicle handles. These
could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten
the life of the vehicle.
Information label also shows the
tire size of the original equipment
tires (C) and the recommended
cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and
page 9-46.
Label Example
There is also important loading
information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label
is attached to the vehicle’s
center pillar (B-pillar). With the
driver’s door open, you will
find the label attached below
the door lock post. The Tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-32
Driving and Operating
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load
1. Locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on your vehicle placard.
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your
trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how
this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs
(136 kg).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 700 lbs
(317 kg).
capacity of your vehicle.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs
The vehicle is neither designed
nor intended to tow a trailer.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-33
vehicle’s capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle’s capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2
Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 1,000 lbs
(453 kg).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs
(340 kg).
B. Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs
Label Example
(453 kg).
C. Available Cargo
A vehicle specific Certification
label, found on the rear edge
of the driver’s door, tells you
the gross weight capacity of
the vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg).
C. Available Cargo
Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg).
Refer to the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-34
Driving and Operating
The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for your vehicle,
or the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
CAUTION (Continued)
{ CAUTION
If you do, parts on the
vehicle can break, and it can
change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause
you to lose control and
crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of the
vehicle.
Things you put inside the
vehicle can strike and injure
people in a sudden stop or
turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the trunk of
your vehicle. In a trunk,
put them as far forward as
you can. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
And, if you do have a heavy
load, you should spread it out.
See “Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit” earlier in
this section.
If you put things inside your
vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything
else — they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or if
there is a crash, they will
keep going.
• Never stack heavier
things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an
{ CAUTION
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
unsecured child restraint
in the vehicle.
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
• When you carry
something inside the
vehicle, secure it
(Continued)
whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded
down unless you need to.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
California Fuel
8-35
soon as possible. If you are using
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
and you hear heavy knocking, the
engine needs service.
Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet
California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California emissions
standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control
system performance might be
Use of the recommended fuel
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of your vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should
meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.
Some gasolines contain an
Gasoline Octane
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
against the use of gasolines
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, you might notice an audible
knocking noise when you drive,
commonly referred to as spark
knock. If this occurs, use a gasoline
rated at 87 octane or higher as
affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp could turn on and your vehicle
might fail a smog-check test. See
page 4-20. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer/retailer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of
fuel used, repairs might not be
page 8-36 for additional information.
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-36
Driving and Operating
We recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
the life of spark plugs and the
performance of the emission control
system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn
on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer/retailer for service.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now required
to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits
from forming, allowing the emission
control system to work properly.
In most cases, you should not have
to add anything to the fuel. However,
some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required
to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations.
To help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean, or if your vehicle
experiences problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Also, your
dealer/retailer has additives that
will help correct and prevent most
deposit-related problems.
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
If you plan on driving in another
country outside the United States or
Canada, the proper fuel might be
hard to find. Never use leaded
gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text
on fuel. Costly repairs caused
by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Your vehicle was not
designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under your
warranty.
Some gasolines that are
not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
To check the fuel availability, ask
an auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in
the country where you will be
driving.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might
be available in your area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving and Operating
8-37
Filling the Tank
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Fuel can spray out on you if
you open the fuel cap too
quickly. If you spill fuel and
then something ignites it, you
could be badly burned. This
spray can happen if your tank
is nearly full, and is more likely
in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any
hiss noise to stop. Then
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island.
Turn off your engine when you
are refueling. Do not smoke if
you are near fuel or refueling
your vehicle. Do not use cellular
phones. Keep sparks, flames,
and smoking materials away
from fuel. Do not leave the fuel
pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children
away from the fuel pump; never
let children pump fuel.
The fuel cap is located behind a
hinged fuel door on the passenger
side of the vehicle.
unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
top off or overfill the tank and wait a
few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as
soon as possible. See Exterior
To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it,
if the cap is released too soon it
will spring back.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8-38
Driving and Operating
When replacing the fuel cap, turn
it clockwise until it clicks. Make
sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would
allow fuel to evaporate into
Notice: If you need a new fuel
cap, be sure to get the right type.
Your dealer/retailer can get one for
you. If you get the wrong type, it
may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator
lamp to light and may damage
your fuel tank and emissions
system. See Malfunction Indicator
CAUTION (Continued)
You can be badly burned and
your vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense fuel only into
approved containers.
• Do not fill a container while
it is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in
contact with the inside of the
fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
the atmosphere. See Malfunction
{ CAUTION
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
{ CAUTION
Never fill a portable fuel
container while it is in your
vehicle. Static electricity
discharge from the container
can ignite the fuel vapor.
• Do not smoke while
pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone
while pumping fuel.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-2
Vehicle Service and Care
Jump Starting
Service
For service and parts needs,
visit your dealer/retailer. You will
receive genuine Saturn parts
and Saturn-trained and supported
service people.
Towing
Genuine Saturn parts have one of
these marks.
Appearance Care
Tire Changing
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
California Perchlorate
9-3
GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM Accessories.
Accessories and
Modifications
When non-dealer/non-retailer
accessories are added to your
vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s
performance and safety, including
such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling,
emissions systems, aerodynamics,
durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and
stability control. Some of these
accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained
in remote keyless entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Also, see Adding Equipment to
page 1-35.
California Proposition 65
Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle),
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
GM Accessories are designed to
complement and function with other
systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize
your vehicle using genuine GM
Accessories. When you go to your
GM dealer/retailer and ask for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-4
Vehicle Service and Care
If you want to do some of your own
service work, you should use the
proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to
service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper
service manual, see Service
on page 11-14.
Doing Your Own
Service Work
Adding Equipment to the
Outside of the Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside
of your vehicle can affect the
airflow around it. This can cause
wind noise and can affect fuel
economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your
dealer/retailer before adding
equipment to the outside of your
vehicle.
{ CAUTION
You can be injured and your
vehicle could be damaged if
you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough
about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient
knowledge, experience, the
proper replacement parts, and
tools before you attempt any
vehicle maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily
confused. If you use the
wrong fasteners, parts can
later break or fall off. You
could be hurt.
Your vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to do your
own service work, see Airbag
You should keep a record with all
parts receipts and list the mileage
and the date of any service work
you perform. See “Maintenance
Record” in the Limited Warranty,
Maintenance and Owner Assistance
Information manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-5
Hood Release
To open the hood:
Owner Checks
{ CAUTION
An electric fan under the hood
can start up and injure you
even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing,
and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
2. Push the secondary hood
release lever upward.
{ CAUTION
Things that burn can get on hot
engine parts and start a fire.
These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid,
3. Lift the hood.
1. Pull the handle that is located
under the instrument panel.
After the hood is slightly lifted, it will
continue to open to the full position.
Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
Then lift the hood to relieve
pressure. Pull the hood down,
close it firmly.
windshield washer and other
fluids, and plastic or rubber.
You or others could be burned.
Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a
hot engine.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-7
Checking Engine Oil
Engine Oil
page 9-11.
It is a good idea to check the
engine oil every time you get fuel.
In order to get an accurate reading,
the oil must be warm and the
on page 9-7.
vehicle must be on level ground.
on page 9-22.
The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 9-6
for the location of the engine oil
dipstick.
If the low oil level light appears on
the instrument cluster, check
the engine oil level right away.
page 4-23. You should check the
engine oil level regularly; this is just
a reminder.
E. Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap.
1. Turn off the engine and give the
oil several minutes to drain back
into the oil pan. If you do not
do this, the oil dipstick might not
show the actual level.
on page 9-34.
page 9-20.
on page 9-7.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with
a paper towel or cloth, then push
it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down
and check the level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-8
Vehicle Service and Care
When to Add Engine Oil
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
•
•
GM6094M
Use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM6094M.
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum)
mark, add at least one quart/liter of
the recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity,
page 10-2.
Look for three things:
SAE 5W-30
SAE 5W-30 is best for the
vehicle. If you are in an area
of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below
Notice: Do not add too much oil.
If the engine has so much oil
that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper
operating range, the engine
could be damaged.
−20°F (−29°C), use either an
SAE 5W-30 synthetic oil or
an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide
easier cold starting and better
protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
These numbers on an oil
container show its viscosity, or
thickness. Do not use other
viscosity oils such as
SAE 20W-50.
on page 9-6 for the location of
the engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-9
When the system has calculated
•
American Petroleum Institute
(API) starburst symbol
Engine Oil Additives
that oil life has been diminished, it
will indicate that an oil change
is necessary. The letters InSP will
appear in the odometer display.
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the mileage indicated on
the display. If you are driving under
the best conditions, the oil life
system might indicate that an oil
change is necessary once a
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will
perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level.
Do not add anything to the oil.
The recommended oils with
the starburst symbol that meet
GM Standard GM6094M are all you
need for good performance and
engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
Oils meeting these requirements
should have the starburst symbol
on the container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has been
certified by the American
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system
that lets you know when to change
the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions
and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving
conditions, the mileage at which an
oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil
life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every
time the oil is changed.
Petroleum Institute (API).
Notice: Use only engine oil
identified as meeting GM Standard
GM6094M and showing the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use
the recommended oil can result in
engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, you must change the
oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km)
since your last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-10
Vehicle Service and Care
3. Press and hold the cluster
stem until the letters InSP
are displayed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your
skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System
4. Hold the cluster stem down and
turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.
calculates when to change the
engine oil and filter based on vehicle
use. Whenever the oil is changed,
reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is
required. If a situation occurs where
you change the oil prior to the
letters InSP appearing in the
5. The letters InSP in the instrument
panel cluster display will flash.
6. Keep the cluster stem down for
at least 20 seconds and then
release the stem.
odometer display, reset the system.
If the letters InSP and the remaining
mileage for the next oil change
appear in the instrument panel
cluster display, the system is
properly reset.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your own
oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose
of oil by putting it in the trash, pouring
it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Recycle
it by taking it to a place that collects
used oil.
After changing the engine oil,
reset the system:
1. Turn the ignition key to
LOCK/OFF.
2. Press the instrument panel
cluster stem until the odometer
is displayed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-11
more information. If you are driving
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
{ CAUTION
Operating the engine with the
air cleaner/filter off can cause
you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans
the air; it helps to stop flames if
the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires,
you could be burned. Do not
drive with it off, and be careful
working on the engine with the
air cleaner/filter off.
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains caked with dirt, a new filter
is required.
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
on page 9-6 for the location of
the engine air cleaner/filter.
1. Remove the screws that hold
the cover on.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter
is off, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine,
which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place
when you are driving.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
3. Lift off the cover.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
Maintenance II intervals and replace
it at the first oil change after each
50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.
See “Schedule Maintenance”
4. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall the cover and reconnect
the electrical connector.
in Service and Maintenance for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-12
Vehicle Service and Care
covered by your warranty.
See “Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants” in the Limited
Warranty, Maintenance and Owner
Assistance Information manual.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in
your vehicle is self-adjusting.
This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from
the brake master cylinder reservoir.
information.
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take your vehicle to the
dealer/retailer service department
and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
Manual Transmission
Fluid
It is not necessary to check the
manual transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to the
dealer/retailer service department
and have it repaired as soon
as possible. You may also have
your fluid level checked by
your dealer/retailer when you have
your oil changed. See “Part D:
Recommended Fluids and
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle
is filled with DEX-COOL® engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in your vehicle for five years
or 150,000 miles (240 000 km),
whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life
coolant.
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. See “Additional
Required Services” in Service
and Maintenance. Be sure to use
the transmission fluid listed in
“Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in Service and
Maintenance.
The following explains your cooling
system and how to add coolant
when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see
Lubricants” in Service and
Maintenance for the proper fluid
to use.
Notice: Use of the incorrect
automatic transmission fluid
may damage your vehicle,
and the damages may not be
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-13
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Notice: If an improper coolant
mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean,
drinkable water and one-half
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down
to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to
265°F (129°C).
DEX-COOL® coolant which will not
damage aluminum parts. If you
use this coolant mixture, you do not
need to add anything else.
Protect against rust and
corrosion.
other parts.
{ CAUTION
Help keep the proper engine
temperature.
Notice: If you use extra
Adding only plain water to
the cooling system can be
dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as
alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will.
The vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture,
the engine could get too hot
but would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could
catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
inhibitors and/or additives in
your vehicle’s cooling system,
you could damage your vehicle.
Use only the proper mixture of
the engine coolant listed in
this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants in the
Maintenance and Limited
Let the warning lights and gages
work as they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than
DEX-COOL® can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant may require changing
sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)
coolant in the vehicle.
Warranty and Owner Assistance
Information manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-14
Vehicle Service and Care
Checking Coolant
Adding Coolant
{ CAUTION
If you need more coolant, add the
proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
at the coolant reservoir, but only
when the engine is cool. If the
coolant reservoir is empty, a special
fill procedure is necessary. See
Cooling System on page 9-16
Turning the coolant reservoir
pressure cap when the engine
and radiator are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to
blow out and burn you badly.
Never turn the coolant
reservoir pressure cap - even
a little - when the engine and
radiator are hot.
for instructions on “How to Add
Coolant to the Coolant Reservoir.”
{ CAUTION
The coolant reservoir is located in
the engine compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle.
on page 9-6 for more information
on location.
The vehicle must be on a level
surface. When your engine is cold,
the coolant level should be at
the KALT/COLD line.
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene
glycol, and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot
engine.
Do not overfill the coolant reservoir.
Too much coolant can result in
an overflow condition when the
fluid is hot.
When replacing the pressure cap,
make sure it is hand-tight and
fully seated.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-15
Notice: If the engine catches fire
because of being driven with
no coolant, your vehicle can be
badly damaged. The costly
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
If Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not
tightly installed, coolant loss
and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is
{ CAUTION
Steam from an overheated
engine can burn you badly,
even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if
you see or hear steam coming
from it. Just turn it off and
get everyone away from the
vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you
open the hood.
properly and tightly secured.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
on page 9-6 for more information
on location.
An engine coolant temperature
warning can indicate a serious
problem. See Engine Coolant
page 4-19.
Engine Overheating
There is an engine coolant
temperature warning light on
your vehicle’s instrument panel.
more information.
If you get an engine coolant
temperature warning, but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when you:
If you keep driving when your
engine is overheated, the
liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly
burned. Stop your engine if it
overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-16
Vehicle Service and Care
If you get the engine coolant
temperature warning with no sign of
steam, try this for a minute or so:
If you no longer have the overheat
warning, you can drive. Just to
be safe, drive slower for about
10 minutes. If the warning does not
come back on, you can drive
normally.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the
hood, this is what you see:
1. If your air conditioner is on,
turn it off.
2. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (NEUTRAL) while
stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull
off the road, shift to P (PARK)
or N (NEUTRAL) and let
If the warning continues and you
have not stopped, pull over, stop,
and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam,
you can idle the engine for
the engine idle.
three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn
off the engine and get everyone out
of the vehicle until it cools down.
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at
the highest fan speed and open
the windows as necessary.
A. Coolant Reservoir
You may decide not to lift the hood
but to get service help right away.
B. Coolant Reservoir Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fans
(Out of view)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-17
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up
even when the engine is not
running and can cause injury.
Keep hands, clothing, and tools
away from any underhood
electric fan.
Heater and radiator hoses, and
other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Notice: Using coolant other
than DEX-COOL® can cause
premature engine, heater core,
or radiator corrosion. In addition,
the engine coolant could require
changing sooner, at 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Any
repairs would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free)
coolant in the vehicle.
Do not run the engine if there
is a leak. If you run the engine,
it could lose all coolant.
That could cause an engine
fire, and you could be burned.
Get any leak fixed before you
drive the vehicle.
If the coolant inside the coolant
reservoir is boiling, do not do
anything else until it cools down.
The vehicle should be parked on a
level surface.
If there seems to be no leak,
with the engine on, check to see
if the electric engine cooling fans are
running. If the engine is overheating,
both fans should be running.
If they are not, your vehicle needs
service.
The coolant level should be at or
above the KALT/COLD mark on the
coolant reservoir. If it is not, you
may have a leak at the coolant
reservoir pressure cap or in
the radiator hoses, heater hoses,
radiator, water pump, or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-18
Vehicle Service and Care
If no coolant is visible in the coolant
reservoir, add coolant as follows:
How to Add Coolant to the
Coolant Reservoir
{ CAUTION
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
Adding only plain water to
the cooling system can be
dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as
alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will.
The vehicle’s coolant warning
system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain
water or the wrong mixture, the
engine could get too hot but
you would not get the overheat
warning. The engine could
catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50
mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{ CAUTION
Steam and scalding liquids
from a hot cooling system can
blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure,
If you have not found a problem yet,
check to see if coolant is visible
in the coolant reservoir. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not
at or above the KALT/COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL®
coolant at the coolant reservoir,
but be sure the cooling system,
including the coolant reservoir
pressure cap, is cool before you
and if you turn the coolant
reservoir pressure cap — even
a little — they can come out at
high speed. Never turn the cap
when the cooling system,
including the coolant reservoir
pressure cap, is hot. Wait for
the cooling system and coolant
reservoir pressure cap to cool
if you ever have to turn the
pressure cap.
page 9-12 for more information.
Notice: In cold weather, water
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core and other
parts. Use the recommended
coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-19
4. With the coolant reservoir
pressure cap off, start the
{ CAUTION
engine and let it run until you
can feel the upper radiator hose
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fans.
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene
glycol and it will burn if the
engine parts are hot enough.
Do not spill coolant on a hot
engine.
Coolant Reservoir
Pressure Cap
By this time, the coolant level
inside the coolant reservoir might
be lower. If the level is lower
than the KALT/COLD mark,
add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant reservoir until
the level reaches the
2. Keep turning the coolant
reservoir pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
1. Remove the coolant reservoir
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
reservoir pressure cap and
upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot. Turn the coolant
reservoir pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about two
or two and one-half turns.
3. Fill the coolant reservoir with
the proper mixture, to the
KALT/COLD mark.
KALT/COLD mark. Wait about
five minutes, then check to
see if the level is below the
mark. If the level is below the
KALT/COLD mark, add additional
coolant to bring the level up to
the mark. Repeat this procedure
until the level remains constant
at the KALT/COLD mark for
at least five minutes.
5. Replace the coolant reservoir
pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and
fully seated.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that
to stop. This will allow any
pressure still left to be vented
out the discharge hose.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-20
Vehicle Service and Care
Notice:
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
•
When using concentrated
When to Check Power
Steering Fluid
What to Use
washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
When you need windshield
It is not necessary to check the
power steering fluid level. A power
steering fluid leak is the only
reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take your vehicle to the
dealer/retailer service department
and have it repaired as soon
as possible.
washer fluid, be sure to read the
manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating
your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing,
use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
•
Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage your
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
Adding Washer Fluid
•
•
Fill the washer fluid tank only
three-quarters full when it is
very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
Open the cap with the washer
symbol on it. Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 9-6
for reservoir location.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in your windshield
washer. It can damage the
vehicle’s windshield washer
system and paint.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
Rear Windshield Wiper
9-21
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Front Windshield Wiper
Windshield wiper blades should be
inspected for wear or cracking.
See “Maintenance Replacement
Parts” in the Limited Warranty,
Maintenance and owner Assistance
Information manual for the proper
type and length.
Raise the wiper arm, tilt the wiper
blade at a 90° angle to the
wiper arm, and remove to the side.
3. Raise the wiper arm away from
the windshield.
1. Lift the wiper arm straight up.
4. Turn the wiper blade at a 90°
angle to the wiper arm and
remove the blade to the side.
2. Push the wiper blade straight out
of the wiper arm to remove.
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. With the key in the ignition and
key in the LOCK position, press
the wiper lever down. Release
the wiper lever when the wipers
are in the vertical position.
3. Install the new wiper blade.
5. Install the new wiper blade.
6. Lower the wiper arm on to the
windshield.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-22
Vehicle Service and Care
have the brake or clutch hydraulic
Refer to “Scheduled Maintenance”
in the Limited Warranty,
Maintenance and Owner Assistance
Information manual to determine
when to check the brake fluid.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
system fixed, since a leak means
that sooner or later the brakes
or clutch will not work well.
It is not a good idea to top off the
brake fluid. Adding brake fluid
will not correct a leak. If fluid is
added when the linings are worn,
there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
as necessary, only when work is
done on the brake or clutch
hydraulic system.
Checking Brake Fluid
The brake fluid can be checked
without taking off the cap by looking
at the brake fluid reservoir.
The brake master cylinder and, on
manual transmission vehicles,
the clutch hydraulic system use the
same reservoir. The reservoir is
filled with DOT-4 brake fluid.
on page 9-6 for the location of
the reservoir.
The fluid level should be above
MIN. If it is not, have your brake
hydraulic system checked to see
if there is a leak. After work is done
on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the
MIN but not over the MAX mark.
{ CAUTION
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an
acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings
are put in, the fluid level goes
back up. The other reason is that
fluid is leaking out of the brake
or clutch hydraulic system. If it is,
If your vehicle has too much
brake fluid, it can spill on the
engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or
others could be burned, and
your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work
is done on the brake and/or
clutch hydraulic system.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid,
use only DOT-4 brake fluid.
It is recommended that you flush
the brake hydraulic system and
refill it with new DOT-4 fluid
at a regular maintenance service
every two years. See “Additional
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-23
Required Services” in the Limited
Warranty, Maintenance and
Owner Assistance Information
manual. Use new brake fluid
from a sealed container only.
See “Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants” in the Limited Warranty,
Maintenance and Owner Assistance
Information manual.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes.
badly damage brake
Notice: Continuing to drive
with worn-out brake pads could
result in costly brake repair.
hydraulic system parts.
For example, just a few drops
of mineral-based oil, such
as engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Front disc brake pads have built-in
brake pad wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound
when the brake pads are worn
and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time your vehicle is
moving, except when you are
pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Always clean the brake fluid
reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it.
This helps keep dirt from entering
the reservoir.
•
If you spill brake fluid on your
vehicle’s painted surfaces, the
paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake
fluid on your vehicle. If you
do, wash it off immediately.
page 9-75.
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
With the wrong kind of fluid in
the brake hydraulic system,
the brakes might not work well.
This could cause a crash.
Always use the proper brake
fluid.
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead
to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound,
have your vehicle serviced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-24
Vehicle Service and Care
Rear disc brake pads do not have
built-in brake pad wear indicators.
Periodic visual inspection of the rear
brake pads is required to determine
when to replace the pads. Visually
inspect the rear brake pads
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when
the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel bolts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel bolts in
the proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities
whenever the rear wheels are
removed such as during tire rotation.
1. Set the parking brake and make
sure that the brakes have been
given enough time to cool.
2. Remove the rear wheels.
Brake pads should be replaced
when the inner pad (C) is
worn to 5/64 in (2 mm) of pad
thickness (B). New brake
pads, with no wear, are 25/64 of
an inch (10 mm) thick.
3. Visually inspect the rear brake
inner pads (C) at each rear
Brake linings should always
be replaced as complete axle sets.
wheel through the inspection
window in the brake caliper (A).
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer/retailer if the brake
pedal does not return to normal
height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be required.
4. After brake pad inspection or
replacement, install the rear
wheels.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop,
the disc brakes adjust for wear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
Vehicle Storage
9-25
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle
is complex. Its many parts have to
be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicle is to have
really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with
top-quality brake parts. When you
replace parts of the braking
system — for example, when the
brake linings wear down and
you need new ones put in — be
sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not,
the brakes might not work properly.
For example, if someone puts in
brake linings that are wrong for
your vehicle, the balance between
the front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The
braking performance you have
come to expect can change in many
other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
Your vehicle has a maintenance
free battery. When it is time
for a new battery, see your
dealer/retailer for one that has the
replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label.
{ CAUTION
Batteries have acid that can
burn you and gas that can
explode. You can be badly hurt
if you are not careful. See Jump
on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
on page 9-6 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals,
and related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands
after handling.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your
vehicle infrequently, remove the
black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep the
battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended
storage of your vehicle, remove the
black, negative (−) cable from
the battery or use a battery trickle
charger. This will help maintain
the charge of the battery over an
extended period of time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-26
Vehicle Service and Care
The vehicle should:
Headlamp aiming is done with the
vehicle’s low-beam headlamps.
The high-beam headlamps will be
correctly aimed if the low-beam
headlamps are aimed properly.
Headlamp Aiming
•
Be placed so the headlamps
are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light
colored wall.
The optical headlamp aiming system
has been preset at the factory
and should need no further
adjustment.
•
Have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all
the way to the wall.
To adjust the vertical aim on
the headlamps:
However, If the vehicle is damaged
in a crash, the headlamp aim
may be affected and adjustment
may be necessary.
•
•
•
Be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall.
information.
Not have any snow, ice, or
mud on it.
If oncoming vehicles flash their high
beams at you, this may also mean
the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
Be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp
aiming is being done.
It is recommended that the vehicle
is taken to your dealer/retailer for
service if the headlamps need to be
re-aimed. It is possible however, to
re-aim the headlamps as described.
•
•
Have a full tank of fuel and
one person or 160 lbs (75 kg)
on the driver seat.
Have all tires properly inflated.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of
the low-beam headlamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-27
3. Record the distance from the
ground to the aim dot on the
low-beam headlamp.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp
to improve beam cut-off when
aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up
which may cause damage to the
headlamp.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps
and place a piece of cardboard
or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted.
Do not place it directly on
the headlamp. This allows only
the beam of light from the
headlamp being adjusted to
be seen on the flat surface.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp
aiming screws, which are under
the hood near each headlamp
assembly.
4. At a wall, measure from the
ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from Step 3
and mark it.
The adjustment screw can be
turned with a 6 mm socket
wrench.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the
mark in Step 4.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw
until the headlamp beam is aimed
to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise
to raise or lower the angle of
the beam.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-28
Vehicle Service and Care
Front Turn Signal Lamps
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs
on page 9-33.
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal
tape line. The lamp on the left (A)
shows the correct headlamp aim.
The lamp on the right (B) shows
the incorrect headlamp aim.
{ CAUTION
Halogen bulbs have
1. The bulbs of the turn signal lamp
are replaced through openings in
the front wheel wells. Turn the
wheel to gain access to the push
tabs and remove the cover.
pressurized gas inside and can
burst if you drop or scratch the
bulb. You or others could be
injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the
bulb package.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-29
To replace one of these bulbs:
1. Open the liftgate.
Taillamps
(Five-Door Hatchback)
2. To replace the bulbs on the
driver side, turn both locks
and remove the cover.
2. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull
straight out.
A. Backup Lamp
B. Taillamp
3. Turn bulb counterclockwise
and remove.
C. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn
Signal Lamp
4. Install new bulb.
To replace the bulbs on the
passenger side, turn the lock
clockwise and remove the cover.
5. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 to
reinstall.
3. Detach the plug connector
from the bulb assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-30
Vehicle Service and Care
9. Install a new bulb without
Taillamps
(Three-Door Hatchback)
touching the glass.
10. Reinstall the bulb assembly in
taillamp assembly.
4. Turn the nuts counterclockwise
and hold the outside of taillamp
assembly.
A. Backup Lamp
B. Taillamp
5. Pull the taillamp assembly
straight out.
11. Make sure the seals are applied
to the taillamp assembly and
screws.
C. Taillamp/Stoplamp/Turn
Signal Lamp
6. Remove the three nuts.
12. Insert the taillamp assembly
into the body.
7. Press on the tabs on the outside
of bulb assembly and remove the
bulb assembly.
13. Reinstall the three nuts.
8. Remove the bulb from the bulb
assembly.
14. Attach the plug connector to the
bulb assembly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-31
To replace one of these bulbs:
page 2-6 for more information.
2. Detach the plug connector from
the bulb assembly.
5. Remove the seal.
10. Make sure the seals are applied
to the taillamp assembly and
screws.
6. Press on the tabs on outside of
bulb assembly and remove the
bulb assembly.
11. Insert the taillamp assembly
into the body.
7. Remove the bulb from the bulb
assembly.
12. Reinstall the three nuts.
8. Install a new bulb without
touching the glass.
13. Attach the plug connector to the
bulb assembly.
9. Reinstall the bulb assembly in
taillamp assembly.
3. Turn the nuts counterclockwise
and hold the outside of taillamp
assembly.
4. Pull the taillamp assembly
straight out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-32
Vehicle Service and Care
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
2. Turn and pull the license plate
lamp toward you through the
opening.
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
1. Push tab in and pull down on it to
remove the license plate lamp.
4. Install the new bulb.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to
reinstall the license plate lamp.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-33
Your vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to your vehicle, see
Replacement Bulbs
Electrical System
Bulb
Number
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Exterior Lamp
Front Turn
Signal Lamp
3157 NAK
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to your vehicle unless
you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment
can damage your vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
your warranty. Some add-on
electrical equipment can keep
other components from working
as they should.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected
by fuses in the fuse block.
An electrical overload will cause
the lamps to turn off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
License Plate
Lamp
W5W
Parking Lamp
Taillamp
4157K
W21
For replacement bulbs not listed
here, contact your dealer/retailer.
Add-on equipment can drain your
vehicle’s battery, even if your vehicle
is not operating.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-34
Vehicle Service and Care
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Fuses
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
The engine compartment fuse block
is located in the front left side of
the engine compartment. Engine
page 9-6.
The windshield wiper motor is
protected by a circuit breaker and a
fuse. If the motor overheats due
to heavy snow, etc., the wiper
will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some
electrical problem, have it fixed.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle
are protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band
inside the fuse. If the band is broken
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
to replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
To open the fuse block cover,
insert a tool into the latch and turn.
Pull up on the cover to remove.
Power Windows and
Other Power Options
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical components on
your vehicle may damage it.
Always keep the covers on any
electrical component.
Circuit breakers in the fuse block
protect the power windows and
other power accessories. When the
current load is too heavy, the
circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed or goes away.
There are two fuse blocks in
your vehicle: one in the engine
compartment and one in the trunk.
There is a fuse puller located
on the rear compartment fuse block.
to easily remove fuses from the
fuse block.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-35
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Antilock Brake
Climate Control
System (Ignition)
6
Engine Cooling Fan
1
2
4
System (ABS) Valves
Windshield & Liftgate
Glass Washer Motor
7
ABS Pump
Engine Cooling
Fan (AT and AC only)
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-36
Vehicle Service and Care
Rear Compartment Fuse
Block
page 2-6.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
8
Horn
ECM (Sensor and
Actuators)
26
27
28
10
13
Door Locks
Foglamps
Power Steering
Automatic
Transmission (Battery)
Windshield Wipers
(high speed)
14
15
16
Automatic
Transmission (Ignition)
Windshield Wipers
(low speed)
29
30
32
ECM (Ignition)
Brake Switch
Antilock Brake System,
Brake Lamp Switch
17
18
20
Vacuum Pump
Starter
Steering Column
Module
34
35
Radio
Air Conditioning Clutch
OnStar™ Module/
OnStar™ Interface
Module/Display
Engine Control
Module (ECM)
(Main Relay)
36
21
The rear compartment fuse block is
located on the left side of the
cargo area behind a cover.
22
24
ECM (Battery)
Fuel Pump/Injectors
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-37
Use the fuse puller, to remove and replace fuses.
Fuses
Usage
Front Power Window
Cluster
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
1
3
Climate Control
System (Battery)
12
Rear Windshield Wiper
4
Climate Control
System (Ignition)
14
11
Rear Defogger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-38
Vehicle Service and Care
Tires
Fuses
Usage
CAUTION (Continued)
Front Passenger Seat
Detection Sensor
Your new vehicle comes with
high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer.
If you ever have questions about
the tire warranty and where to
obtain service, see the “Limited
Warranty, Maintenance and
Owner Assistance Information”
manual for details.
16
• Underinflated tires pose
the same danger as
overloaded tires.
The resulting accident
could cause serious
Tire Pressure
Monitoring
System (TPMS)/
Rain Sensor/Inside
Rearview Mirror
17
injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the
recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be
checked when your tires
are cold. See Inflation - Tire
• Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep
tires at the recommended
pressure.
18
21
22
23
Interior Lights
Outside Mirror Heating
Sunroof
{ CAUTION
Rear Power Window
• Poorly maintained and
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can
cause overheating as a
result of too much flexing.
You could have an air-out
and a serious accident.
on page 8-30.
Diagnostic Link
Connector
24
29
Accessory Power
Outlet (APO)
34
38
39
Sunroof
Door Locks
Seat Heating Driver
(Continued)
Seat Heating Front
Passenger
40
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
Winter Tires
9-39
Notice: If the vehicle has
low-profile tires, they are
more susceptible to damage
from road hazards or curb
impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel
CAUTION (Continued)
If the vehicle has 225/40ZR18 or
215/45R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance
tires. These tires are designed for
very responsive driving on wet or dry
pavement. If you expect to drive
on snow or ice covered roads often,
you may want to get winter tires
for your vehicle. All season tires
provide good overall performance on
most surfaces but they may not
offer the traction you would like or
the same level of performance
as winter tires on snow or ice
covered roads.
• Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your tread
is badly worn, or if your
tires have been damaged,
replace them.
assembly damage can occur
when coming into contact with
road hazards like, potholes,
or sharp edged objects,
or when sliding into a curb.
The vehicle warranty does not
cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and,
on page 9-47 for inflation
pressure adjustment for
high speed driving.
Low-Profile Tires
when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes, and
other road hazards.
If the vehicle has 225/40ZR18
or 215/45R18 size tires, they
are classified as low-profile
performance tires. These tires
are designed for very responsive
driving on wet or dry pavement.
You may also notice more
road noise with low-profile
performance tires and that they
tend to wear faster.
Winter tires, in general, are
designed for increased traction on
snow and ice covered roads.
With winter tires, there may be
decreased dry road traction,
increased road noise, and shorter
tire tread life. After switching to
winter tires, be alert for changes in
vehicle handling and braking.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-40
Vehicle Service and Care
See your dealer/retailer for details
regarding winter tire availability
and proper tire selection. Also, see
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is
a combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire’s width, height,
aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description.
See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more
detail.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a
tire is molded into its sidewall.
The examples below show
a typical passenger vehicle
tire and a compact spare
tire sidewall.
If you choose to use winter tires:
•
•
Use tires of the same brand and
tread type on all four wheel
positions.
Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
speed rating as your original
equipment tires.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Winter tires with the same speed
rating as the original equipment tires
may not be available for H, V, W,
Y and ZR speed rated tires.
If you choose winter tires with a
lower speed rating, never exceed
the tire’s maximum speed capability.
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that the tire
is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
Example
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-41
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following DOT (Department
of Transportation) code is the
Tire Identification Number (TIN).
The TIN shows the manufacturer
and plant code, tire size, and
date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only
one side may have the date
of manufacture.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
(B) Temporary Use Only:
The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread
life of approximately 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) and should not be
driven at speeds over 50 mph
(80 km/h). The compact
spare tire is for emergency use
when a regular road tire has
lost air and gone flat. If your
vehicle has a compact spare tire.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in the
sidewall and under the tread.
(C) Tire Identification
Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT
(Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows
the manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
Compact Spare Tire Example
manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type
of cord and number of plies in the
sidewall and under the tread.
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-42
Vehicle Service and Care
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum
pressure needed to support
that load.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system.
The letter P as the first
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet
or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
character in the tire size
means a passenger vehicle tire
engineered to standards set by
the U.S. Tire and Rim
(E) Tire Inflation: The
temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated
to 60 psi (420 kPa). For more
information on tire pressure
and inflation see Inflation - Tire
Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows
an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(F) Tire Size : A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as
the first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
number that indicates the tire
height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-43
(D) Construction Code:
A letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias
ply construction.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of
air inside the tire pressing
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire
in which the plies are laid at
alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
outward on each square inch
of the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in pounds per square
inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
Accessory Weight: This means
the combined weight of optional
accessories. Some examples
of optional accessories are,
automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a
tire, measured in pounds
per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire
has built up heat from driving.
page 9-46.
(F) Service Description:
These characters represent the
load range and speed rating
of the tire. The load index
represents the load carry
capacity a tire is certified to
carry. The load index can range
from 1 to 279. The speed
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire’s height to its width.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard
and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel,
oil, and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between the
plies and the tread. Cords may
be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-44
Vehicle Service and Care
DOT Markings: A code molded
into the sidewall of a tire
Intended Outboard Sidewall:
Maximum Loaded Vehicle
The side of an asymmetrical tire, Weight: The sum of curb
signifying that the tire is in
compliance with the U.S.
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and date
of production.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on light duty trucks
and some multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Occupant Distribution:
Designated seating positions.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Loading the Vehicle
on page 8-30.
Outward Facing Sidewall:
The side of an asymmetrical tire
that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on
a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall,
Maximum Inflation
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle.
page 8-30.
Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire
can be inflated. The maximum
air pressure is molded onto
the sidewall.
bears white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the
same moldings on the
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the rear axle.
page 8-30.
Maximum Load Rating:
The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
other sidewall of the tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-45
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
A tire used on passenger cars
and some light duty trucks
and multipurpose vehicles.
Traction: The friction between
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus the
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
rated cargo load. See Loading
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread remains.
manufacturer’s recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See
Vehicle Maximum Load on
the Tire: Load on an individual
tire due to curb weight,
accessory weight, occupant
weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label
permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s
capacity weight and the original
equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure.
See “Tire and Loading
Information Label” under
page 8-30.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid
at 90 degrees to the centerline
of the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that provides
consumers with ratings for a
tire’s traction, temperature,
and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing
procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the
tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating
the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-46
Vehicle Service and Care
A vehicle specific Tire and
Loading Information label is
attached to your vehicle.
When to Check
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount
of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Check your tires once a month
or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it
should be at 60 psi (420 kPa).
For additional information
regarding the compact spare
page 9-67.
This label shows your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and
the correct inflation pressures for
your tires when they are cold.
The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the
label, is the minimum amount
of air pressure needed to
Notice: Do not let anyone tell
you that under-inflation or
over-inflation is all right. It is
not. If your tires do not have
enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
How to Check
support your vehicle’s maximum
load carrying capacity.
Use a good quality pocket-type
gage to check tire pressure.
You cannot tell if your tires are
properly inflated simply by
looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even
when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation
pressure when the tires are
cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more
than 1 mile (1.6 km).
For additional information
regarding how much weight your
vehicle can carry, and an
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
• Reduced fuel economy
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Loading
How you load your vehicle
affects vehicle handling and
ride comfort. Never load
If your tires have too much air
(over-inflation), you can get
the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
your vehicle with more weight
than it was designed to carry.
• Needless damage from
road hazards
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-47
If the vehicle has P205/55R16 size
tires, additional air pressure is
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the
High-Speed Operation
required when driving the vehicle at
speeds of 99 mph (158 km/h) or
higher. Set the cold tire inflation
pressure to the maximum inflation
pressure shown on the tire sidewall,
or 32 psi (220 kPa), whichever is
lower. See the example following.
tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until you reach the
recommended amount.
{ CAUTION
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph
(160 km/h) or higher, puts an
additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving
causes excessive heat build up
and can cause sudden tire
failure. You could have a crash
and you or others could be
killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure
adjustment for high speed
operation. When speed limits
and road conditions are such
that a vehicle can be driven at
high speeds, make sure the
tires are rated for high speed
operation, in excellent
Example:
The maximum load and inflation
pressure is molded on the tire’s
sidewall, in small letters, near the
rim flange. It reads something
like this: Maximum load 710 kg
(1565 lbs) 350 kPa (51 psi) Max.
Press.
If you overfill the tire, release air
by pushing on the metal stem
in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with
the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps
back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by
keeping out dirt and moisture.
For this example, the cold tire
inflation pressure for high-speed
driving should be set at 32 psi
(220 kPa).
condition, and set to the correct
cold tire inflation pressure for
the vehicle load.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-48
Vehicle Service and Care
When high-speed driving ends,
return the tire pressure to the
recommended cold inflation
pressure shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See
Tire pressure should be checked
and correctly set when the tires are
cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 9-46.
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than
the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure
label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)
Please note that the TPMS is
not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low
tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
Tire Pressure Monitor
System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires
and transmit tire pressure readings to
a receiver located in the vehicle.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on
a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-49
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS
The TPMS operates on a radio
frequency and complies with
RSS-210 of Industry and Science
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) operates on a radio
frequency and complies with
Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
1. This device may not cause
interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
1. This device may not cause
harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changes or modifications to this
system by other than an authorized
service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
additional information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-50
Vehicle Service and Care
The low tire pressure warning light
comes on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to
example of the Tire and Load
Information label and its location on
the vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire
Tire Pressure Monitor
Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) is designed to warn the
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and
wheel assembly, excluding the
spare tire. The TPMS sensors
monitor the air pressure in the
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire
pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
the correct inflation pressure.
The low tire pressure warning light
may come on in cool weather
when the vehicle is first started, and
then turn off as you start to drive.
This could be an early indicator that
the air pressure in the tire(s) are
getting low and need to be inflated
to the proper pressure.
The vehicle’s TPMS can warn you
about a low tire pressure condition
but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 9-38.
Notice: Liquid tire sealants
could damage the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) sensors.
Sensor damage caused by
using a tire sealant is not covered
by your warranty. Do not use
liquid tire sealants.
You must begin driving before the
TPMS system is operational.
TPMS sensors need to be installed
onto the full-size tire and wheel
assemblies, and the tires adjusted
to the manufacturers’ recommended
tire pressure amount.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique
identification code. Any time
you replace one or more of the
TPMS sensors or rotate the
vehicle’s tires, the identification
codes are automatically learned by
the TPMS. This occurs within a
few moments of driving the vehicle
over 19 mph (31 km/h).
When a loondition
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning
light located in the instrument
panel cluster.
A Tire and Load Information label is
attached to the vehicle, and shows
the size of the vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for the tires when
they are cold. See Loading the
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-51
TPMS Malfunction Light
•
•
Replacement tires or wheels do
Tire Inspection and
Rotation
Inspect tires regularly for signs of
wear or damage. Also inspect the
spare tire. For more information
on tire inspection, see When It Is
not match the vehicle’s original
equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those
recommended for the vehicle
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS
sensors are missing or inoperable.
When the system detects a
malfunction, the low tire warning
light flashes for about one minute
and then stays on for the remainder
of the ignition cycle. Some of the
conditions that can cause the
malfunction light to come on are:
Operating electronic devices or
being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
Rotating vehicle tires helps them
to wear evenly and keeps the
vehicle performing like it did
when tires were new.
•
One of the road tires has been
replaced with the spare tire. The
spare tire does not have a TPMS
sensor. The TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message should go
off once you re-install the road tire
containing the TPMS sensor.
Rotate the tires and check
wheel alignment approximately
every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km) or when
unusual tire wear is noted.
See “Scheduled Maintenance”
in the Index of the “Limited
Warranty, Maintenance
If the TPMS is not functioning it
cannot detect or signal a low tire
condition. See your dealer/retailer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light comes on and stays on.
•
One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The TPMS
malfunction light should go off
after the TPMS sensors are
installed and the vehicle is
and Owner Assistance
Information” manual for more
information. Also check the
wheels for damage, see Wheel
Replacement on page 9-58
for more information.
driven for a few moments over
19 mph (31 km/h). See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-52
Vehicle Service and Care
To prevent corrosion or rust
build-up, lightly coat the wheel
hub center and the cone-shaped
surface of each wheel bolt
with wheel bearing grease,
after a wheel change.
{ CAUTION
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or
on the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel
bolts become loose after
time. The wheel could come
off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirt from places
where the wheel attaches to
the vehicle using a scraper
or wire brush.
page 9-60 for information
on installing the tire and wheel
assembly. Also see “Wheel
Bolt Torque” under Capacities
Use this pattern when rotating
the vehicle tires. Do not include
the compact spare tire in the
tire rotation.
Adjust the front and rear tires to
the recommended cold tire
inflation pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. See Inflation - Tire
Installing wheels with a good
metal-to-metal contact at
the mounting surfaces is
necessary to prevent wheel
bolts from becoming loose.
page 8-30.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-53
You need new tires if any of the
following statements are true:
The rubber in tires degrades over
time, even if they are not being
used. This is also true for the
spare tire, if the vehicle has one.
Multiple conditions affect how
fast this aging takes place, including
temperatures, loading conditions,
and inflation pressure maintenance.
With proper care and maintenance
tires typically wear out before
they degrade due to age. If you are
unsure about the need to replace
the tires as they get older, consult
the tire manufacturer for more
information.
When It Is Time for
New Tires
•
You can see the indicators at
three or more places around
the tire.
Various factors, such as
maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading,
and road conditions influence
when you need new tires.
•
•
You can see cord or fabric
showing through the tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked,
cut, or snagged deep enough to
show cord or fabric.
•
•
The tire has a bump, bulge,
or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut, or
other damage that cannot be
repaired well because of the size
or location of the damage.
One way to tell when it is time for
new tires is to check the treadwear
indicators, which will appear when
the tires have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-54
Vehicle Service and Care
and tire pressure monitoring
Buying New Tires
{ CAUTION
performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s
sidewall near the tire size. If the tires
have an all-season tread design,
the TPC Spec number will be
followed by an MS for mud and
page 9-40 for additional information.
GM has developed and matched
specific tires for your vehicle.
The original equipment tires installed
on your vehicle, when it was new,
were designed to meet General
Motors Tire Performance Criteria
Specification (TPC Spec) system
rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends
that you get tires with the same
TPC Spec rating. This way,
your vehicle will continue to have
tires that are designed to give
the same performance and vehicle
safety, during normal use, as
the original tires.
Mixing tires could cause you
to lose control while driving.
If you mix tires of different
sizes, brands, or types
(radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle
properly, and you could
have a crash. Using tires
of different sizes, brands,
or types may also cause
damage to the vehicle.
Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires
on all wheels. It is all right
to drive with the compact
spare temporarily, as it was
developed for use on the
vehicle. See Compact Spare
GM recommends replacing tires
in sets of four. This is because
uniform tread depth on all tires will
help keep your vehicle performing
most like it did when the tires were
new. Replacing less than a full
set of tires can affect the braking
and handling performance of
your vehicle. See Tire Inspection
information on proper tire rotation.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system
considers over a dozen critical
specifications that impact the
overall performance of your vehicle,
including brake system performance,
ride and handling, traction control,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-55
level you would get with TPC Spec
rated tires. See Tire Pressure
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
If you add different sized
If you use bias-ply tires on
the vehicle, the wheel rim
flanges could develop cracks
after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail
suddenly, causing a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
Your vehicle’s original equipment
tires are listed on the Tire and
Loading Information Label. See
for more information about the
Tire and Loading Information Label
and its location on your vehicle.
wheels, your vehicle may not
provide an acceptable level of
performance and safety if tires
not recommended for those
wheels are selected. You may
increase the chance that you
will crash and suffer serious
injury. Only use Saturn specific
wheel and tire systems
Different Size Tires
and Wheels
If you add wheels or tires that are
a different size than your original
equipment wheels and tires,
this may affect the way your vehicle
performs, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover.
Additionally, if your vehicle has
electronic systems such as, anti-lock
brakes, traction control, and
If you must replace your vehicle’s
tires with those that do not have
a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range,
speed rating, and construction type
(radial and bias-belted tires) as
your vehicle’s original tires.
developed for your vehicle, and
have them properly installed by
a Saturn certified technician.
on page 9-3 for additional
information.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure
monitoring system could give
an inaccurate low-pressure warning
if non-TPC Spec rated tires are
installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a
stability control, the performance of
these systems can be affected.
low-pressure warning that is higher
or lower than the proper warning
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-56
Vehicle Service and Care
on the sidewalls of most
Treadwear
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
passenger car tires. The Uniform
Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep
tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver, or temporary
use spare tires, tires with
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on
a specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or
to some limited-production tires.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary
with respect to these grades,
they must also conform to
federal safety requirements and
additional General Motors
Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
The following information relates
to the system developed by
the United States National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear,
traction, and temperature
performance. This applies only
to vehicles sold in the United
States. The grades are molded
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-57
Traction – AA, A, B, C
Temperature – A, B, C
Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The traction grades, from highest The temperature grades are
to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
{ WARNING
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
The temperature grade
for this tire is established
for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
{ WARNING
The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not
include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-58
Vehicle Service and Care
If you need to replace any of the
wheels or wheel bolts, replace
them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will
be sure to have the right wheel
and wheel bolts for the vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and
Tire Balance
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked or badly rusted or corroded.
If the wheel bolts keep coming
loose, the wheel and wheel bolts
should be replaced. If the wheel
leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can
sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these
conditions exist.
The tires and wheels on your
vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give
you the longest tire life and best
overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular
basis. However, if you notice
unusual tire wear or your vehicle
pulling to one side or the other,
the alignment might need to
be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a
smooth road, the tires and wheels
might need to be rebalanced.
See your dealer/retailer for proper
diagnosis.
{ CAUTION
Using the wrong replacement
wheels or wheel bolts on your
vehicle can be dangerous.
Your dealer/retailer will know the
kind of wheel you need.
It could affect the braking and
handling of the vehicle, make
the tires lose air and make you
lose control of the vehicle. You
could have a collision in which
you or others could be injured.
Always use the correct wheel
and wheel bolts for replacement.
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset and be
mounted the same way as the one
it replaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-59
Notice: The wrong wheel can
also cause problems with bearing
life, brake cooling, speedometer
or odometer calibration,
headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire
or tire chain clearance to the
body and chassis.
Tire Chains
CAUTION (Continued)
{ CAUTION
Use another type of traction
device only if its manufacturer
recommends it for use on
the vehicle and tire size
combination and road
conditions. Follow that
manufacturer’s instructions.
To help avoid damage to the
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust
or remove the device if it is
contacting the vehicle, and do
not spin the vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices
that will fit, install them on the
front tires.
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire
chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of
clearance can cause damage to
the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area
damaged by the tire chains
could cause you to lose control
of the vehicle and you or others
may be injured in a crash.
page 9-60 for more information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{ CAUTION
Putting a used wheel on the
vehicle is dangerous. You
(Continued)
cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been
driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause a crash. If you have
to replace a wheel, use a new
GM original equipment wheel.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-60
Vehicle Service and Care
way you want the vehicle to go.
It may be very bumpy and noisy, but
you can still steer. Gently brake to
a stop, well off the road if possible.
Changing a Flat Tire
Tire Changing
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place. Turn on the
hazard warning flashers.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while you are driving, especially if
you maintain your vehicle’s tires
properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment
and training. The jack provided
with your vehicle is designed
only for changing a flat tire. If it
is used for anything else, you or
others could be badly injured or
killed if the vehicle slips off the
jack. Use the jack provided with
your vehicle only for changing a
flat tire.
Changing a tire can be
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
dangerous. The vehicle can slip
off the jack and roll over or fall
on you or other people. You and
they could be badly injured or
even killed. Find a level place
to change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from
moving:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates
a drag that pulls the vehicle toward
that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop well out of the
traffic lane.
1. Set the parking brake
firmly.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction you
would use in a skid. In any rear
blowout remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
under control by steering the
2. Put an automatic
If a tire goes flat, the next part
shows how to use the jacking
equipment to change a flat tire
safely.
transmission shift lever in
P (Park), or shift a manual
transmission to 1 (First) or
R (Reverse).
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
Removing the Spare Tire
9-61
CAUTION (Continued)
and Tools
3. Turn off the engine and
do not restart while the
vehicle is raised.
The equipment you will need is
located in the rear storage area.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
page 2-6.
To be certain the vehicle will
not move, put blocks at the
front and rear of the tire
farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be
the tire on the other side, at the
opposite end of the vehicle.
3. Remove the foam pad. Turn the
retainer counterclockwise to
remove it.
4. Remove the spare tire by pulling
it up and out of the trunk.
2. Lift the floor cover to access the
spare tire and tools.
When you have a flat tire, place the
wheel block at the tire diagonally
across from the flat tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-62
Vehicle Service and Care
Removing the Flat Tire
and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. If your vehicle has wheel covers,
remove the cover.
Do not try to put a wheel cover
on your compact spare tire. It will
not fit. Store the wheel cover
in the trunk until you have the flat
tire repaired or replaced.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on your vehicle’s compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
5. The jack and tools are stored
below the spare tire.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen
all the wheel bolts. Do not
remove them yet.
6. The tools you will be using
include the jack (A), wheel
wrench (B) and jack handle (C).
2. If your vehicle has wheel bolt
caps, remove the caps. Store
the caps with the wheel cover.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-63
{ CAUTION
Getting under a vehicle when
it is jacked up is dangerous.
If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you could be badly injured or
killed. Never get under a
vehicle when it is supported
only by a jack.
{ CAUTION
4. Position the jack lift head at the
jack location nearest the flat
tire. The location is indicated by
a mark on the bottom edge
of the vehicle.
Notice: Make sure that the
jack lift head is in the correct
position or you may damage your
vehicle. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
Raising your vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit
the jack lift head into the
proper location before raising
the vehicle.
5. Put the compact spare tire
near you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-64
Vehicle Service and Care
{ CAUTION
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on
the parts to which it is
fastened, can make wheel bolts
become loose after time. The
wheel could come off and
cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where
the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you
can use a cloth or a paper
towel to do this; but be sure to
use a scraper or wire brush
later, if needed, to get all the
rust or dirt off. See Changing a
6. Raise the vehicle by turning the
jack handle clockwise. Raise the
vehicle far enough off the
8. Remove any rust or dirt from the
wheel bolts, mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
ground so there is enough room
for the compact spare tire to
fit under the vehicle.
Installing wheels with a good
metal-to-metal contact at
the mounting surface is
necessary to prevent the wheel
bolts from becoming loose.
7. Remove all of the wheel bolts.
To prevent corrosion or rust
build-up, apply a light coat of
wheel bearing grease to the
wheel hub center and to the
cone-shaped surface of each
wheel bolt at every wheel change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-65
9. Place the compact spare tire on
the wheel-mounting surface.
12. Tighten the wheel bolts firmly
CAUTION (Continued)
in a crisscross sequence,
as shown.
replace them, be sure to get
new original equipment wheel
bolts. Stop somewhere as
soon as you can and have the
bolts tightened with a torque
wrench to the proper torque
specification. See Capacities
page 10-2 for wheel bolt
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel bolts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel bolts
in the proper sequence and to
the proper torque specification.
on page 10-2 for the wheel bolt
torque specification.
10. Reinstall the wheel bolts with
the rounded end of the bolts
toward the wheel. Tighten each
bolt by hand until the wheel
is held against the hub.
{ CAUTION
Incorrect or improperly
tightened wheel bolts can
cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could
lead to a crash. If you have to
11. Lower the vehicle by turning the
jack handle counterclockwise.
Lower the jack completely.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-66
Vehicle Service and Care
To store a flat or spare tire and
tools, do the following:
Storing a Flat or Spare
Tire and Tools
{ CAUTION
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle
could cause injury. In a
sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike
someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
2. Place the flat tire face down into
the spare tire hub.
A. Jack
3. Turn spare tire hold-down bolt by
turning clockwise. Return the
B. Wheel Wrench
C. Jack Handle
foam pad to its original position.
1. Replace the jack and tools
as shown.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-67
Notice: When the compact
spare is installed, do not take
your vehicle through an
automatic car wash with guide
rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can
damage the tire and wheel, and
maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire
was fully inflated when the vehicle
was new, it can lose air after
a time. Check the inflation
pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare
on the vehicle, stop as soon
as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated.
The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to
50 mph (80 km/h) for distances
up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you
can finish your trip and have the
full-size tire repaired or replaced at
your convenience. Of course, it
is best to replace the spare with a
full-size tire as soon as possible.
The spare tire will last longer and
be in good shape in case it is
needed again.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare
tire or wheel with other wheels
or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
4. Put the load floor back in place.
The compact spare tire is for
temporary use only. Replace the
compact spare with a full-size tire
as soon as possible.
Notice: Tire chains will not
fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage your vehicle
and can damage the chains
too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-68
Vehicle Service and Care
Notice: Ignoring these steps
could result in costly damage to
your vehicle that would not
be covered by your warranty.
To avoid the possibility of the
vehicles rolling, set the parking
brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start
procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P)
or a manual transmission in
NEUTRAL before setting
the parking brake.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, try to
use another vehicle and some
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
Be sure to use the following steps
to do it safely.
Trying to start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not work,
and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
{ CAUTION
Notice: If you leave your radio or
other accessories on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
would not be covered by your
warranty. Always turn off your
radio and other accessories when
jump starting your vehicle.
Batteries can hurt you. They
can be dangerous because:
• They contain acid that can
burn you.
• They contain gas that can
explode or ignite.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s
system is not a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both
vehicles can be damaged. Only
use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump
start your vehicle.
• They contain enough
electricity to burn you.
3. Turn off the ignition on both
vehicles. Unplug unnecessary
accessories plugged into the
cigarette lighter or the accessory
power outlet. Turn off the radio
and all lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help
save both batteries. And it could
save the radio!
2. Get the vehicles close enough
so the jumper cables can
If you do not follow these steps
exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
reach, but be sure the vehicles
are not touching each other.
If they are, it could cause
a ground connection you do not
want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad
grounding could damage the
electrical systems.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-69
4. Open the hoods and locate the
batteries. Find the positive (+)
and negative (−) terminal
locations on each vehicle. Your
vehicle’s positive (+) terminal
is identified by “+” sign on battery
case or terminal. Engine
{ CAUTION
CAUTION (Continued)
Using a match near a battery
can cause battery gas to
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been
blinded. Use a flashlight if you
need more light.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
page 9-6.
Be sure the battery has enough
water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, be sure
the right amount of fluid is
there. If it is low, add water to
take care of that first. If you
don’t, explosive gas could be
present.
{ CAUTION
{ CAUTION
An electric fan can start up
even when the engine is not
running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood
electric fan.
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly.
Keep your hands away from
moving parts once the engine
is running.
(Continued)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-70
Vehicle Service and Care
5. Check that the jumper cables do
not have loose or missing
insulation. If they do, you could
get a shock. The vehicles
6. Connect the red positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the dead battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables,
here are some things you to
know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one. Negative (−) will go
to the engine lift hook.
7. Do not let the other end touch
metal. Connect it to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the
good battery. Use a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to
negative (−) or you will get
a short that would damage the
battery and maybe other parts
too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal on the
dead battery because this can
cause sparks.
9. Connect the other end of the
negative (−) cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away from
the dead battery, but not
near engine parts that move.
Connect it to the engine lift hook.
You may need to scrape the
surface with your jumper cable
to obtain a proper ground.
The electrical connection is just
as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the
battery is much less.
Do not let the other end touch
anything until the next step.
The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead
battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-71
10. Now start the vehicle with the
good battery and run the
engine for a while.
To disconnect the jumper cables
from both vehicles, do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−)
cable from the vehicle that had
the dead battery.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had
the dead battery. If it will not
start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables
do not touch each other or
other metal.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
Jumper Cable Removal
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative (–)
Terminal
5. Return the caps over the
positive (+) and negative (–)
terminals to their original
positions.
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (–) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-72
Vehicle Service and Care
Recreational Vehicle
Towing
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy
towing your vehicle may
cause damage because of
reduced ground clearance.
Always put your vehicle on a
flatbed trailer.
Towing
Appearance Care
Towing Your Vehicle
The vehicle was neither designed
nor intended to be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground.
Interior Cleaning
Your vehicle’s interior will continue
to look its best if it is cleaned
often. Although not always visible,
dust and dirt can accumulate
on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic
surfaces. Regular vacuuming
is recommended to remove particles
from the upholstery. It is important
to keep your upholstery from
becoming and remaining heavily
soiled. Soils should be removed as
quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s
interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to
set rapidly.
Consult your dealer/retailer or a
professional towing service if
the disabled vehicle needs to be
towed. See Roadside Assistance
The vehicle was neither designed
nor intended to be towed with any
of its wheels on the ground.
Notice: Dolly towing or dinghy
towing your vehicle may
cause damage because of
reduced ground clearance.
Always put your vehicle on a
flatbed truck.
Towing a Trailer
The vehicle is neither designed nor
intended to tow a trailer.
Lighter colored interiors may require
more frequent cleaning. Use care
because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home
furnishings may also transfer color
to your vehicle’s interior.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-73
When cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, only use cleaners
Before using cleaners, read and
adhere to all safety instructions on
the label. While cleaning your
vehicle’s interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening your
•
Never apply heavy pressure or
rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
specifically designed for the
surfaces being cleaned. Permanent
damage may result from using
cleaners on surfaces for which they
were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any
accidental over-spray from other
surfaces immediately. To prevent
over-spray, apply cleaner directly to
the cleaning cloth.
vehicle’s doors and windows.
•
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Avoid laundry detergents or
dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue
that leaves streaks and attracts
dirt. For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per gallon (3.78 L)
of water is a good guide.
Dust may be removed from small
buttons and knobs using a small
brush with soft bristles.
Your dealer/retailer has a product
for cleaning your vehicle’s glass.
You can also obtain a product from
your dealer/retailer to remove
Notice: If you use abrasive
cleaners when cleaning glass
surfaces on your vehicle, you
could scratch the glass and/or
cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass
on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using
the following cleaners or techniques:
•
•
Do not heavily saturate the
upholstery while cleaning.
•
Never use a knife or any other
sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
Damage to your vehicle’s interior
may result from the use of
many organic solvents such as
naptha, alcohol, etc.
Many cleaners contain solvents
that may become concentrated in
your vehicle’s breathing space.
•
Never use a stiff brush. It can
cause damage to your vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-74
Vehicle Service and Care
To clean, use the following
instructions:
test a small hidden area for
colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment frequently to
remove dust and loose dirt.
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white
cloth with water or club soda.
A canister vacuum with a beater bar
in the nozzle may only be used
on floor carpet and carpeted floor
mats. For soils, always try to remove
them first with plain water or club
soda. Before cleaning, gently
remove as much of the soil as
possible using one of the following
techniques:
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess
moisture.
After the cleaning process has been
completed, a paper towel can be
used to blot excess moisture
from the fabric or carpet.
3. Start on the outside edge of the
soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water
can be used to remove dust.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled
area until the cleaning cloth
remains clean.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can be
used. Allow the leather to dry
naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Never use steam to clean leather.
Never use spot lifters or spot
•
For liquids: gently blot the
remaining soil with a paper towel.
Allow the soil to absorb into
the paper towel until no more
can be removed.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process that was used with
plain water.
•
For solid dry soils: remove as
much as possible and then
vacuum.
removers on leather. Many
If any of the soil remains, a
commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary.
When a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter is to be used,
commercial leather cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect leather may permanently
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
Exterior Cleaning
9-75
change the appearance and feel
of your leather and are not
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance
and feel of your interior and are
not recommended. Do not use
silicone or wax-based products, or
those containing organic solvents to
clean your vehicle’s interior
Cleaning Exterior
Lamps/Lenses
recommended. Do not use silicone
or wax-based products, or those
containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they
can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on
leather.
Use only lukewarm or cold water,
a soft cloth and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing
Your Vehicle” later in this section.
because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
Finish Care
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and
Other Plastic Surfaces
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of your vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. You can get
approved cleaning products from
your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
on page 9-80.
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on your instrument
panel. The increase in gloss
may cause annoying reflections in
the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the
A soft cloth dampened with water
may be used to remove dust.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove
dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters
or removers on plastic surfaces.
windshield under certain conditions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-76
Vehicle Service and Care
If your vehicle has a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat
gives more depth and gloss to
the colored basecoat. Always use
waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years. You
can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle
garaged or covered whenever
possible.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your
vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by
washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight. Use a car washing soap.
Notice: Machine compounding
or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on your
vehicle.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain
chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on your
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on your vehicle
or damage may occur and it would
not be covered by the warranty.
Protecting Exterior Bright
Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be
cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or
use chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Foreign materials such as calcium
chloride and other salts, ice
Use special care with aluminum trim.
To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam or caustic soap
to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright
metal parts.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal or plastic
on your vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from
your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle
melting agents, road oil and tar,
tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals
from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if
they remain on painted surfaces.
Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use
non-abrasive cleaners that are
marked safe for painted surfaces to
remove foreign matter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-77
page 9-80. Follow all manufacturers’
directions regarding correct
product usage, necessary safety
precautions and appropriate
magnesium, calcium or sodium
chloride. These chlorides are
used on roads for conditions
such as ice and dust. Always
wash your vehicle’s chrome with
soap and water after exposure.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be required.
See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the
Index of the “Maintenance and
Warranty and Owner assistance
Information” manual.
disposal of any vehicle care product.
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Notice: If you use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, you
could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty.
Use only approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and
water spotting.
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum
or Chrome
Your vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
High pressure car washes may
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 12 inches (30 cm)
to the surface of the vehicle.
Use of power washers exceeding
1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can result
in damage or removal of paint
and decals.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft
clean cloth with mild soap and water.
Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean
towel. A wax may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of your
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because you could damage
the surface. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Chrome wheels and
other chrome trim may be
damaged if you do not wash your
vehicle after driving on roads
that have been sprayed with
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-78
Vehicle Service and Care
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
Use chrome polish on chrome
wheels only.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Tires
Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush
with tire cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or
a mild detergent. Wash the
windshield thoroughly when cleaning
the blades. Bugs, road grime,
sap, and a buildup of vehicle
wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the
wiper blades if they are worn or
damaged.
Notice: Using petroleum-based
tire dressing products on your
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Use chrome polish only on
chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
any painted surface of the wheel,
and buff off immediately after
application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could
damage the aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels. The repairs
would not be covered by your
warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels through an
automatic car wash that uses
silicone carbide tire cleaning
brushes.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or replaced
to restore corrosion protection.
Wipers can be damaged by:
•
•
•
•
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining
the vehicle warranty.
Snow and ice, without proper
removal
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-79
Finish Damage
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Any stone chips, fractures or deep
scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts such
as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and
exhaust system even though they
have corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Minor chips and scratches can be
repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer/retailer.
Larger areas of finish damage
can be corrected in your dealer’s/
retailer’s body and paint shop.
At least every spring, flush these
materials from the underbody
with plain water. Clean any areas
where mud and debris can collect.
Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before
being flushed. Your dealer/retailer
or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job
causes this, we will repair, at no
charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this
fallout condition within 12 months
or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of
purchase, whichever occurs first.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-80
Vehicle Service and Care
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Interior and exterior polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil, and asphalt.
Use on chrome or stainless steel.
Tar and Road Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner and Polish
White Sidewall Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black marks from
whitewalls and raised white lettering.
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime, smoke and
fingerprints.
Chrome Wheel Cleaner
Finish Enhancer
Removes dirt and grime from
chrome wheels.
Removes dust, fingerprints, and
surface contaminants. Spray on and
wipe off.
Swirl Remover Polish
Cleaner Wax
Removes swirl marks, fine scratches,
and other light surface
contamination.
Removes light scratches and
protects finish.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Service and Care
9-81
Description
Usage
Foaming Tire Shine Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and protects tires.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Spot Lifter
Medium foaming shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes. Biodegradable
and phosphate free.
Quickly removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor eliminator used
on fabrics, vinyl, leather and carpet.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9-82
Vehicle Service and Care
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
10-1
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
Technical Data
The eighth character in the VIN is
the engine code. This code helps
identify the vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See “Engine Specifications”
on page 10-2 for your vehicle’s
engine code.
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Vehicle Identification
Capacities and
Specifications
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label is on the trunk floor.
It is very helpful if you ever need
to order parts. The label has
the following information:
This is the legal identifier for your
vehicle. It appears on a plate in the
front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver side. It can be seen
through the windshield from outside
the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of
title and registration.
•
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
•
•
•
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special
equipment
Do not remove this label from the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-2
Technical Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the
index of the “Limited Warranty, Maintenance and Owner Assistance Information” manual.
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more
information.
Cooling System
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
6.2 qt
7.3 qt
5.9 L
6.9 L
4.5 L
45.0 L
4.8 qt
11.9 gal
Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Manual Transmission
Wheel Bolt Torque
4.2 qt
1.6 qt
81 lb ft
4.0 L
1.5 L
110 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Technical Data
10-3
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
Automatic
Manual
1.8L L4
1
0.035 in (0.90 mm)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10-4
Technical Data
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
11-1
Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your retailer and to
Saturn. Together we are committed
to providing our customers with
unparalleled service, before, during,
and after the purchase of a
Saturn vehicle, for total customer
satisfaction. We call this the Saturn
Difference. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle are resolved
by the retailer’s sales or service
departments. If, for any reason, your
ownership experience falls below
your expectations, we suggest
you take the following action:
Customer Information
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail
Customer Assistance Liaison. Any
member of the retail management
team has the authority and the
desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly
resolved at this level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-2
Customer Information
STEP TWO: Should you need
additional assistance, in the U.S.,
contact the Saturn Customer
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out-of-court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. This program is
available at no cost to you, our
customer.
•
•
•
The name of your selling and
servicing retail facility.
Vehicle delivery date and present
mileage.
Assistance Center by calling
1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call the
Saturn Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-1999. A Saturn
Customer Assistance Center team
member will handle your call and
assist in providing product and
warranty information, the nearest
retailer location, roadside assistance,
brochures, literature and discuss any
concerns you may have.
Your daytime and evening phone
numbers.
When contacting Saturn, please
remember that your concern
will likely be resolved at a retailer’s
facility. That is why we suggest
you follow Step One first.
Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute
resolution program prior to filing a
court action, use of the program is
free of charge and your case is
generally heard within 40 days. If you
do not agree with the decision given
in your case, you can reject it and
proceed with any other venue for
relief available to you.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners):
Both Saturn and its retailers are
committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn
vehicle. However, if you continue to
remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and
Two, Saturn and its retailers offer
the additional assistance of a
neutral party through our voluntary
participation in a mediation/
arbitration program called Better
Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line.
We encourage you to call the toll-free
number in order to give your inquiry
prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
Representative:
•
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). This 17-digit number
can be found on the vehicle
registration or title, on the
upper driver side corner of the
instrument panel, or on your
roadside assistance key card.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
11-3
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program
by using the toll-free telephone
number or by writing them at the
following address:
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
For further information concerning
eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.
Alternatively, you may call the
Saturn Customer Communication
Centre, 1-800-263-1999, or you
may write to:
General Motors Participation in
the Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel
your concerns have been addressed
after following the procedure outlined
in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of
Canada Limited has committed to
binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle
service claims. The program
provides for the review of the facts
involved by an impartial third party
arbiter, and may include an informal
hearing before the arbiter. The
program is designed so that the
entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint
to the final decision, should be
completed in approximately 70 days.
We believe our impartial program
offers advantages over courts in
most jurisdictions because it is
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in
all 50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage and other
factors. Saturn Corporation reserves
the right to change eligibility
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Your inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
informal, quick, and free of charge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-4
Customer Information
My GM Canada (Canada only)
Online Owner Center
Customer Assistance for
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist owners who have hearing
difficulties, Saturn has installed
special TDD (Telecommunication
Devices for the Deaf) equipment in
its Saturn Customer Assistance
Center.
My GM Canada is a
(United States only)
password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save
information on GM vehicles, get
personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
This is a resource for your Saturn
ownership needs. Specific vehicle
information can be found in one
place.
The Online Owner Center allows
you to:
Here are a few of the valuable tools
and services you will have access to:
•
•
Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
Any hearing or speech-impaired
customer who has access to a TDD
or to a conventional Text Telephone
(TTY) can communicate with
Saturn by dialing 1-800-TDD-6000.
TTY users in Canada may dial
1-800-263-3830.
Access information about
your specific vehicle, including
tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details
such as address and phone
number for each of your preferred
GM Dealers or Retailers.
•
Keep track of your vehicle’s
service history and maintenance
schedule.
− My Driveway: Receive service
reminders and helpful advice on
owning and maintaining your
vehicle.
•
•
Find Saturn retailers for service
nationwide.
Receive special promotions and
privileges only available to
members.
− My Preferences: Manage your
profile, subscribe to E-News
and use tools and forms with
greater ease.
Refer to saturn.com on the web for
updated information and to
register your vehicle.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada
section within gmcanada.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
11-5
gmcanada.com
For more details, or to determine
your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
your Saturn retailer or call the
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-553-6000. Text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
Customer Assistance
Offices
Saturn encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for
assistance. If a customer wishes to
write to Saturn, the letter should
be addressed to:
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
In Canada, customers may call the
Saturn Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
TTY users in Canada may call
1-800-263-3830.
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
1-800-553-6000
Roadside Assistance
Program
For vehicles purchased in the
U.S., call 1-800-553-6000; (Text
Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438).
1-800-833-6000 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-553-6000
This program, available to qualified
applicants, can reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger adaptive
equipment you may require for
your vehicle such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
In Canada, write to:
For vehicles purchased in Canada,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Saturn Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Saturn
vehicle, you are automatically
enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program.
The offer is available for a limited
period of time from the date of
vehicle purchase/lease.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-6
Customer Information
The customer is responsible for
the repair or replacement of the
tire if not covered by a
Who is Covered?
•
Lock-Out Service: Lock-out
service is covered at no charge if
you are unable to gain entry into
your vehicle. A remote unlock
may be available if you have an
active OnStar® subscription.
To ensure security, the driver
must present personal
identification before lock-out
service is provided. In Canada,
the vehicle registration is also
required.
Roadside Assistance coverage is for
the vehicle operator, regardless of
ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the
consent of the owner is not eligible
for coverage.
warrantable failure.
•
•
Jump Start: A battery jump start
is covered at no charge if the
vehicle does not start.
Trip Routing Service (Canada
Only): Upon request, Roadside
Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps,
highlighting your choice of either
the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination,
anywhere in North America, along
with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
Services Provided
The following services are provided
in the U.S. and Canada up to
5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first, and, in
Canada only, up to a maximum
of $100.
•
•
Emergency Tow From a Public
Roadway or Highway: Tow to
the nearest Saturn retailer for
warranty service or in the event
of a vehicle-disabling crash.
Winch-out assistance is provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand,
mud, or snow.
•
Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough
fuel for the vehicle to get to
the nearest service station
(approximately $5 Canada).
In Canada, service to provide
diesel may be restricted. For
safety reasons, propane and
other alternative fuels are not
provided through this service.
Please allow three weeks before
your planned departure date.
Trip routing requests are limited
to six per calendar year.
Flat Tire Change: Installation of a
spare tire in good condition, when
equipped and properly inflated,
is covered at no charge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
11-7
Once authorization has been
given, your advisor will help
you make any necessary
arrangements and explain how
to claim for trip interruption
expense assistance.
owner or driver when, in their sole
discretion, the claims become
excessive in frequency or type of
occurrence.
•
Trip Interruption Benefits and
Assistance (Canada Only): In
the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en
route and over 250 kilometres
from the original point of
Calling for Assistance
departure, you might qualify
for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance
covers reasonable reimbursement
of up to a maximum of $500
(Canadian) for (A) meals
(maximum of $50/day), (B)
lodging (maximum of $100/night),
and (C) alternate ground
transportation (maximum of
$40/day). This benefit is to assist
you with some of the unplanned
expense you may incur while
waiting for your vehicle to be
repaired.
For prompt and efficient assistance
when calling, please provide the
following to the Roadside Assistance
Representatives:
•
Alternative Service (Canada
Only): There could be times
when Roadside Assistance
cannot provide timely assistance.
Your advisor may authorize
you to secure local emergency
road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon
submission of the original receipt
to Roadside Assistance.
•
Your name, home address, and
home telephone number
•
Telephone number of your
location
•
•
Location of the vehicle
Model, year, color, and license
plate number of the vehicle
In many instances, mechanical
failures may be covered. However,
any cost for parts and labor for
non-warranty repairs are the
responsibility of the driver.
•
•
Odometer reading, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) and
delivery date of the vehicle
Pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy of
the repair order are required.
Saturn and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or reimbursement to an
Description of the problem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-8
Customer Information
Towing and Road Service
Exclusions
Scheduling Service
Appointments
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership
Specifically excluded from Roadside
Assistance coverage are towing
or services for vehicles operated on
a non-public roadway or highway,
fines, impound towing caused
by a violation of local, Municipal,
State, Provincial or Federal law, and
mounting, dismounting or changing
of snow tires, chains, or other
traction devices.
experience, we and our participating
retailers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the Bumper
to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended
powertrain warranty in both the U.S.
and Canada.
When your vehicle requires warranty
service, contact your dealer/retailer
and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment
and advising your service consultant
of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize
your inconvenience.
Several courtesy transportation
options are available to assist
in reducing your inconvenience
when warranty repairs are required.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled
into the service department
Roadside Assistance is not part
of or included in the coverage
provided by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Saturn and General
Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance
program at any time without
notification.
immediately, keep driving it until
it can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your
dealership/retailer, let them know
this, and ask for instructions.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
If the dealer/retailer requests you to
bring the vehicle for service, you
are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow
for the same day repair.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
11-9
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Your retailer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept
for an overnight warranty repair.
Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may include
minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
Warranty service can generally
be completed while you wait.
However, if you are unable to wait,
Saturn helps to minimize your
inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on
the circumstances, your retailer can
offer you one of the following:
If your vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of
the retailer’s shuttle service, the
expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up
to the maximum amount allowed by
Saturn for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you
arrange transportation through
a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect actual
costs and be supported by original
receipts. See your retailer for
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Retailers may
provide you with shuttle service to
get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily
schedule. This includes one-way or
round trip shuttle service within
reasonable time and distance
parameters of the retailer’s area.
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
It may not be possible to provide a
like-vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-10
Customer Information
Recycled original equipment parts
may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to
maintain your vehicle’s originally
designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Additional Program
Information
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have
the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish your vehicle’s resale
value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every retailer. Please contact your
retailer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will
be administered by appropriate
retailer personnel.
Saturn reserves the right to
unilaterally modify, change or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation
at any time and to resolve all
questions of claim eligibility pursuant
to the terms and conditions
described herein at its sole
discretion.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which your vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM Collision
parts are your best choice to ensure
that your vehicle’s designed
appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain your
GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are
also available. These are made
by companies other than GM and
may not have been tested for
your vehicle. As a result, these
parts may fit poorly, exhibit
premature durability/corrosion
problems, and may not perform
properly in subsequent collisions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
If a Crash Occurs
11-11
Aftermarket parts are not covered
by your GM New Vehicle Limited
Warranty, and any vehicle failure
related to such parts are not covered
by that warranty.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for
damage repairs by using aftermarket
collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify
Here is what to do if you are
involved in a crash.
•
Check to make sure that you are
all right. If you are uninjured,
make sure that no one else in
your vehicle, or the other vehicle,
is injured.
Repair Facility
aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current insurance
carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
We recommend that you choose a
collision repair facility that meets
your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision
repair center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
•
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help.
Do not leave the scene of a
crash until all matters have been
taken care of. Move your vehicle
only if its position puts you in
danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing
company may require you to have
insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read your lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
your lease for poor quality repairs.
•
Give only the necessary and
requested information to police
and other parties involved in
the crash. Do not discuss your
personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to
the crash. This will help guard
against post-crash legal action.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in
the quality of coverage afforded
by various insurance policy terms.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-12
Customer Information
company and policy number, and
a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
•
If you need roadside assistance,
call GM Roadside Assistance.
information.
•
Once you have an estimate, read
it carefully and make sure you
understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you
have a question, ask for an
explanation. Reputable shops
welcome this opportunity.
•
If possible, call your insurance
company from the scene of the
crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If
they ask for a police report, phone
or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and
you can get a copy of the report
for a nominal fee. In some
states/provinces with “no fault”
insurance laws, a report may not
be necessary. This is especially
true if there are no injuries and
both vehicles are drivable.
•
If your vehicle cannot be driven,
know where the towing service
will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write
down the driver’s name, the
service’s name, and the phone
number.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle
requires damage repairs, GM
recommends that you take an
active role in its repair. If you have
a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or
have it towed there. Specify to the
facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment
parts, either new Genuine GM parts
or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not
be covered by your GM vehicle
warranty.
•
•
Remove any valuables from your
vehicle before it is towed away.
Make sure this includes your
insurance information and
registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
•
Choose a reputable collision
repair facility for your vehicle.
Whether you select a dealer/
retailer or a private collision repair
facility to fix the damage, make
sure you are comfortable with
them. Remember, you will have to
feel comfortable with their work for
a long time.
Gather the important information
you will need from the other
driver. Things like name, address,
phone number, driver’s license
number, vehicle license plate,
vehicle make, model and model
year, Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), insurance
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
11-13
Insurance pays the bill for the
repair, but you must live with
the repair. Depending on your policy
limits, your insurance company
may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this
with your repair professional,
and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased
you may be obligated to have
the vehicle repaired with Genuine
GM parts, even if your insurance
coverage does not pay the full cost.
However, NHTSA cannot
Reporting Safety
Defects
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
retailer or Saturn Corporation.
Reporting Safety Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA), in addition to notifying
Saturn Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington D.C., 20590
If another party’s insurance
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
safercar.gov.
company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as cost stays within reasonable
limits.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it could open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it could order a
recall and remedy campaign.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-14
Customer Information
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Service Publications
to the Canadian
Government
to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, please notify Saturn.
Ordering Information
Service Manuals
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has
a safety defect, notify Transport
Canada immediately, in addition to
notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
A variety of publications are
available to you. Saturn service
manuals are written for trained
technicians, and in some cases,
specialized tools and equipment are
necessary to complete certain
repairs. However, the manuals are
available to owners who either
have the training, or wish to gain a
greater understanding of the
Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
Transport Canada
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or
write:
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
Saturn Customer Communication
Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
technical aspect of their Saturn.
For additional publications
information or to order publications
in the United States, call toll
free 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
www.saturn-publications.com to
order on-line.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals
are available by calling toll free
1-800-551-4123.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
11-15
Bulletins cover various subjects.
Some pertain to the proper use and
care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe
inexpensive repairs which, if done on
time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
Owner Publications
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven.
For example, your vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment and
deploy airbags in a crash and, if so
equipped, to provide antilock braking
to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to
help your dealer/retailer technician
service your vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owner’s personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.
Information on how to obtain
product bulletins and as described
below is applicable only in the
fifty U.S. states and the District
of Columbia, and only for cars and
light trucks with a Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) less
than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg).
Copies of individual bulletins
are also at your participating Saturn
retailer. You can ask to see them.
Some bulletins tell a technician how
to repair a new or unexpected
condition. Others describe a quicker
way to fix your vehicle. They can
help a technician service your
vehicle better.
In Canada, information relating
to product service bulletins can
be obtained by contacting your
Saturn retailer.
Most bulletins apply to conditions
affecting a small number of vehicles.
Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine
if a specific bulletin applies to
your vehicle. To order Saturn
bulletins, call Saturn Publications
at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
saturn-publications.com to order
online.
Service Bulletins
Saturn regularly sends its retailers
useful service bulletins about Saturn
products. Saturn monitors product
performance in the field. We then
prepare bulletins for servicing our
products better. You can get these
bulletins, too.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-16
Customer Information
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
Important: EDR data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the
EDR data with the type of personally
identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle has an Event
•
How various systems in your
vehicle were operating
Data Recorder (EDR). The main
purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road
obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related
to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
•
Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened
•
•
How far, if at all, the driver was
pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal
How fast the vehicle was
traveling
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Information
11-17
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you
subscribe to the OnStar services,
please refer to the OnStar
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Saturn will not access this data or
share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request of police or
similar government office; as part
of Saturn’s defense of litigation
through the discovery process; or,
as required by law. Data that Saturn
collects or receives may also be
used for Saturn research needs or
may be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
RFID technology is used in some
vehicles for functions such as
tire pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as key fobs for remote door
locking/unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
Saturn vehicles does not use
Terms and Conditions for
information on data collection and
on page 4-38 in this manual
for more information.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and for
deletion instructions.
or record personal information or
link with any other Saturn system
containing personal information.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11-18
Customer Information
✍ NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-2
INDEX
Child Restraints (cont.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-3
Driving (cont.)
D
Daytime Running Lamps ......... 5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-4
INDEX
Fuel (cont.)
F
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-5
Light (cont.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-6
INDEX
Loading Your Vehicle ............ 8-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-7
Power (cont.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-8
INDEX
S
Safety Belts .......................... 1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX
i-9
Tires (cont.)
Tires (cont.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
i-10
INDEX
Windshield (cont.)
U
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading ........................... 9-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|